GE

Grid Solutions

F650 Digital Bay Controller

Instruction Manual
Firmware version: 9.0x
EnerVista F650 Setup version: 9.0x
GE publication code: 1601-0800-A4

LISTED

*1601-0800-A4*
© 2024 GE Multilin. All rights reserved.
GE Multilin F650 Digital Bay Controller instruction manual for revision 1601-0800-A4.

F650 Digital Bay Controller, EnerVista, and EnerVista 650 family Setup are registered
trademarks of GE Multilin.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin.
This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the permission of GE Multilin.

Part number: 1601-0800-A4 (April 2024)

Disclaimer
It is the responsibility of the user to verify and validate the suitability of all GE Grid
Automation products. This equipment must be used within its design limits. The proper
application including the configuration and setting of this product to suit the power
system assets is the responsibility of the user, who is also required to ensure that all local or
regional safety guidelines are adhered to. Incorrect application of this product could risk
damage to property/the environment, personal injuries or fatalities and shall be the sole
responsibility of the person/entity applying and qualifying the product for use.
The content of this document has been developed to provide guidance to properly install,
configure and maintain this product for its intended applications. This guidance is not
intended to cover every possible contingency that may arise during commissioning,
operation, service, or maintenance activities. Should you encounter any circumstances not
clearly addressed in this document, please contact your local GE service site.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER TO SECURE THEIR NETWORK AND

ASSOCIATED DEVICES AGAINST CYBER SECURITY INTRUSIONS OR ATTACKS. GE GRID
AUTOMATION AND ITS AFFILIATES ARE NOT LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES AND/OR LOSSES
ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO SUCH SECURITY INTRUSION OR ATTACKS.
GE
Grid Solutions

F650 Digital Bay Controller

Table of Contents

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 Important procedures ..................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Cautions and warnings ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1.1 General cautions and warnings.................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1.2 Communication board withdrawal/insertion......................................................................1-3
1.1.1.3 Magnetic module terminals.........................................................................................................1-4
1.1.2 Inspection checklist............................................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.3 Safety instructions ................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.1.3.1 General safety instructions ..........................................................................................................1-8
1.1.3.2 Warning symbols ..............................................................................................................................1-9
1.2 Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.1 Introduction to the 650 family of relays ....................................................................1-10
1.2.2 Hardware architecture ......................................................................................................1-10
1.2.2.1 F650 basic design.......................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.2.2 F650 signal type ............................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.2.3 Communications architecture .......................................................................................1-11
1.3 EnerVista 650 Setup software ...................................................................... 1-14
1.3.1 System requirements .........................................................................................................1-14
1.3.2 Installation...............................................................................................................................1-14
1.3.3 Connecting EnerVista 650 Setup to the F650 .........................................................1-18
1.3.3.1 Configuring an Ethernet connection .................................................................................... 1-18
1.3.3.2 Configuring the RS232 connection........................................................................................ 1-18
1.4 650 hardware .................................................................................................. 1-19
1.4.1 Mounting & wiring................................................................................................................1-19
1.4.2 650 communications..........................................................................................................1-19
1.4.3 Faceplate display .................................................................................................................1-20
1.4.4 Maintenance...........................................................................................................................1-21
1.4.4.1 General maintenance .................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.4.4.2 In-service maintenance.............................................................................................................. 1-21
1.4.4.3 Out-of-service maintenance .................................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.4.4 Unscheduled maintenance....................................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.5 Storage......................................................................................................................................1-21
1.4.6 Repairs.......................................................................................................................................1-22
1.4.7 Disposal.....................................................................................................................................1-22

2 PRODUCT 2.1 F650 Overview................................................................................................... 2-1

DESCRIPTION 2.2 ANSI device numbers and functions ............................................................. 2-3

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-1

 2.3 Other device functions .................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Order codes ....................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5 Technical specifications .................................................................................. 2-8
2.5.1 Protection ...................................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.2 Control....................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.3 Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.5.4 User-programmable .......................................................................................................... 2-21
2.5.5 Metering ................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.6 Inputs......................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.7 Real time clock ...................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.8 Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.9 Control power supply......................................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.10 Communications.................................................................................................................. 2-25
2.5.11 Optical ....................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.5.12 Environmental ....................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.13 Packaging and weight....................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.14 Type tests................................................................................................................................. 2-28
2.5.15 Approvals................................................................................................................................. 2-29
2.6 External connections .....................................................................................2-30

3 HARDWARE 3.1 Module description........................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Power supply..................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Mechanical description ................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Mounting.....................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 Rear description ......................................................................................................................3-7
3.4 Wiring ...............................................................................................................3-11
3.4.1 External connections.......................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.2 Digital inputs with trip circuit supervision ................................................................ 3-11
3.4.3 Cable/fiber Ethernet board ............................................................................................. 3-12
3.5 Transceiver optical power budget vs. link length ....................................3-13

4 INTERFACES, 4.1 EnerVista 650 Setup software ........................................................................ 4-1

SETTINGS & ACTUAL 4.1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................4-1
VALUES 4.1.1.1 Using settings files ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.2 Viewing actual values..................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.3 Viewing triggered events .............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.1.4 Firmware upgrades ......................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.5 One line diagrams ............................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.2 Main screen ...............................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.3 Connect to the relay ..............................................................................................................4-4
4.1.3.1 Computer Settings: .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.3.2 Communication Control: ............................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.3.3 Communication Optimization:.................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 File management menu ......................................................................................................4-6
4.1.4.1 File Management menu for firmware below v7.70 .......................................................... 4-6
4.1.4.2 File Management menu for firmware v7.70 and above ..............................................4-10
4.1.5 EnerVista 650 Setup menu.............................................................................................. 4-14
4.1.6 File menu ................................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.1.6.1 New......................................................................................................................................................4-16
4.1.6.2 Open .....................................................................................................................................................4-17
4.1.6.3 Save/Save as ....................................................................................................................................4-20
4.1.6.4 Close .....................................................................................................................................................4-21
4.1.6.5 Configuration file converter.......................................................................................................4-22
4.1.6.6 Properties ...........................................................................................................................................4-25
4.1.6.7 Print options......................................................................................................................................4-26

1-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

 4.1.6.8 Compare to settings file.............................................................................................................. 4-27
4.1.6.9 PLC checksum calculation......................................................................................................... 4-27
4.1.6.10 Setting checksum calculation.................................................................................................. 4-28
4.1.7 Setpoint menu .......................................................................................................................4-28
4.1.7.1 Product setup menu..................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.1.7.2 Communication settings menu............................................................................................... 4-29
4.1.7.3 System setup menu ...................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.1.7.4 Breaker menu .................................................................................................................................. 4-30
4.1.7.5 Protection elements menu ........................................................................................................ 4-30
4.1.7.6 Control elements menu .............................................................................................................. 4-33
4.1.7.7 Inputs/Outputs menu................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.1.7.8 Quick settings menu..................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.1.7.9 Relay configuration menu ......................................................................................................... 4-35
4.1.7.10 Logic Configuration menu ......................................................................................................... 4-37
4.1.7.11 IEC 103 Configuration menu ................................................................................................... 4-38
4.1.7.12 Clock menu ....................................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.1.8 Actual values menu.............................................................................................................4-39
4.1.8.1 Front panel........................................................................................................................................ 4-39
4.1.8.2 Status................................................................................................................................................... 4-39
4.1.8.3 Metering ............................................................................................................................................. 4-41
4.1.8.4 Inputs/Outputs menu................................................................................................................... 4-42
4.1.8.5 Records menu ................................................................................................................................. 4-42
4.1.9 Operations menu..................................................................................................................4-43
4.1.10 Communications menu.....................................................................................................4-43
4.1.11 Security menu........................................................................................................................4-45
4.1.12 View menu...............................................................................................................................4-46
4.1.13 Help menu ...............................................................................................................................4-46
4.2 Human-machine interface (HMI) ................................................................ 4-47
4.2.1 Display .......................................................................................................................................4-48
4.2.2 LED indicators ........................................................................................................................4-49
4.2.3 Pushbuttons............................................................................................................................4-49
4.2.3.1 Keypad and shuttle key .............................................................................................................. 4-49
4.2.3.2 Command push button............................................................................................................... 4-51
4.2.4 Front port and cover sealing system ..........................................................................4-51
4.2.5 Screen contrast.....................................................................................................................4-52
4.2.6 Text menus..............................................................................................................................4-52
4.2.6.1 Navigation......................................................................................................................................... 4-52
4.2.6.2 Text menu hierarchy .................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.2.6.3 Actual Values ................................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.2.6.4 Snapshot events............................................................................................................................. 4-55
4.2.6.5 Fault report ....................................................................................................................................... 4-56
4.2.6.6 View settings menu....................................................................................................................... 4-58
4.2.6.7 Change Settings ............................................................................................................................. 4-62
4.2.6.8 Date & time....................................................................................................................................... 4-63
4.2.6.9 Commands........................................................................................................................................ 4-64
4.2.6.10 Passwords ......................................................................................................................................... 4-65
4.2.6.11 Select main screen........................................................................................................................ 4-67
4.2.6.12 Select language.............................................................................................................................. 4-67
4.2.7 Graphic display......................................................................................................................4-68
4.2.7.1 One-line diagram........................................................................................................................... 4-68
4.2.7.2 Metering screen.............................................................................................................................. 4-69
4.2.7.3 All events screen ............................................................................................................................ 4-70
4.2.7.4 New events screen........................................................................................................................ 4-72
4.2.7.5 Alarms panel .................................................................................................................................... 4-73
4.2.7.6 Input/output monitoring screen ............................................................................................. 4-74
4.3 Web server...................................................................................................... 4-77
4.3.1 Home..........................................................................................................................................4-77
4.3.2 Snapshot events ...................................................................................................................4-78
4.3.3 Control events........................................................................................................................4-79

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-3

 4.3.4 Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 4-80
4.3.5 Oscillography ......................................................................................................................... 4-81
4.3.6 Fault report ............................................................................................................................. 4-82
4.3.7 Data logger............................................................................................................................. 4-83

5 SETPOINTS 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1.1 Setpoint main menu ..............................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Product setup .................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Communication settings .....................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1.1 Serial ports........................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1.2 Network (Ethernet) ........................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1.3 MODBUS protocol............................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.1.4 DNP3 slave........................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.1.5 IEC 60870-5-104 ............................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.1.6 SNTP......................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.2.1.7 Procome protocol settings.........................................................................................................5-11
5.2.1.8 IEC 870-5-103 protocol settings..............................................................................................5-11
5.2.1.9 PTP IEEE 1588 protocol settings ..............................................................................................5-12
5.2.1.10 Routing ................................................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.2 MODBUS user map settings............................................................................................ 5-16
5.2.3 Fault report settings ........................................................................................................... 5-17
5.2.3.1 Fault report settings......................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.3.2 Fault report retrieval .....................................................................................................................5-19
5.2.4 Oscillography settings ....................................................................................................... 5-20
5.2.4.1 Oscillography settings..................................................................................................................5-20
5.2.4.2 Oscillography states......................................................................................................................5-21
5.2.4.3 Oscillography file retrieval..........................................................................................................5-22
5.2.5 Data logger settings ........................................................................................................... 5-22
5.2.5.1 Data logger SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................5-22
5.2.5.2 Data logger associated states .................................................................................................5-23
5.2.5.3 Data logger file format and retrieval.....................................................................................5-23
5.2.6 Demand settings.................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.2.6.1 Metering values and settings....................................................................................................5-24
5.2.6.2 Demand calculation methods..................................................................................................5-25
5.2.6.3 Demand function measurements and states...................................................................5-28
5.2.7 Time Settings.......................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.3 System setup...................................................................................................5-32
5.3.1 General settings ................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.3.2 Miscellaneous settings ...................................................................................................... 5-32
5.3.2.1 Out of service setting...................................................................................................................5-32
5.3.2.2 Local - remote block setting......................................................................................................5-35
5.3.3 FlexCurve settings ............................................................................................................... 5-35
5.3.4 Breaker settings.................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.3.4.1 Breaker maintenance...................................................................................................................5-38
5.3.5 Switchgear settings ............................................................................................................ 5-39
5.4 Protection elements.......................................................................................5-40
5.4.1 Available settings and setting groups........................................................................ 5-40
5.4.1.1 Firmware 7.2x and below ...........................................................................................................5-40
5.4.1.2 Firmware 7.50 or above ..............................................................................................................5-44
5.4.2 Inverse time curve characteristics .............................................................................. 5-48
5.4.2.1 IEEE curves .......................................................................................................................................5-49
5.4.2.2 IEC curves..........................................................................................................................................5-50
5.4.2.3 IAC curves .........................................................................................................................................5-52
5.4.2.4 ANSI curves .......................................................................................................................................5-53
5.4.2.5 I2t curves...........................................................................................................................................5-55
5.4.2.6 Definite time curves.......................................................................................................................5-55
5.4.2.7 Rectifier time curves......................................................................................................................5-55
5.4.2.8 User curves - FlexCurves A/B/C/D ..........................................................................................5-56

1-4 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

 5.4.3 Phase current.........................................................................................................................5-57
5.4.3.1 Phase time delayed overcurrent elements – phase high/low (51Ph/51pl) ......... 5-57
5.4.3.2 Phase instantaneous overcurrent element- phase high/low (50PH/ 50PL) ....... 5-60
5.4.3.3 Phase directional element (67P).............................................................................................. 5-62
5.4.3.4 Thermal model element (49)..................................................................................................... 5-67
5.4.4 Neutral current......................................................................................................................5-68
5.4.4.1 Neutral time-delayed overcurrent element (51N) .......................................................... 5-68
5.4.4.2 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element (50N) ........................................................ 5-68
5.4.4.3 Neutral directional element (67N) .......................................................................................... 5-70
5.4.4.4 Voltage polarization operation principles .......................................................................... 5-71
5.4.4.5 Current polarization operation principles: ......................................................................... 5-72
5.4.5 Ground current......................................................................................................................5-74
5.4.5.1 Ground time-delayed overcurrent element (51G) .......................................................... 5-74
5.4.5.2 Ground instantaneous overcurrent element (50G)........................................................ 5-75
5.4.5.3 Ground directional element (67G) .......................................................................................... 5-75
5.4.6 Sensitive ground current .................................................................................................5-77
5.4.6.1 Sensitive ground time-delayed overcurrent element (51SG) .................................... 5-77
5.4.6.2 Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element (50SG).................................. 5-78
5.4.6.3 Instantaneous overcurrent element for ungrounded systems (50IG)................... 5-78
5.4.6.4 Sensitive ground directional element (67SG) .................................................................... 5-80
5.4.7 Negative sequence current.............................................................................................5-82
5.4.7.1 Negative sequence overcurrent element (46P) ............................................................... 5-82
5.4.8 Voltage elements..................................................................................................................5-83
5.4.8.1 Phase undervoltage element (27P)........................................................................................ 5-84
5.4.8.2 Phase overvoltage element (59P)........................................................................................... 5-85
5.4.8.3 Neutral overvoltage element high/low (59NH/59nl) ..................................................... 5-85
5.4.8.4 Negative sequence overvoltage element (47).................................................................. 5-86
5.4.8.5 Auxiliary overvoltage element (59X)...................................................................................... 5-86
5.4.8.6 Auxiliary undervoltage element (27X)................................................................................... 5-87
5.4.9 Power elements ....................................................................................................................5-87
5.4.9.1 Forward power element (32FP) ............................................................................................... 5-87
5.4.9.2 Directional power element (32) ............................................................................................... 5-88
5.4.9.3 Wattmetric ground fault (32N)................................................................................................. 5-93
5.4.10 Frequency elements ...........................................................................................................5-97
5.4.10.1 Underfrequency element (81U) ............................................................................................... 5-97
5.4.10.2 Overfrequency element (81O) .................................................................................................. 5-98
5.4.10.3 Frequency rate of change ......................................................................................................... 5-98
5.4.11 Miscellaneous elements.................................................................................................5-100
5.4.11.1 Broken conductor ........................................................................................................................5-100
5.4.11.2 Locker rotor ....................................................................................................................................5-100
5.4.12 Load encroachment ........................................................................................................ 5-102
5.5 Control elements ..........................................................................................5-104
5.5.1 Setting group.......................................................................................................................5-104
5.5.2 Synchronism check element - synchrocheck (25) .............................................5-105
5.5.2.1 Voltage inputs................................................................................................................................5-106
5.5.2.2 Application ......................................................................................................................................5-106
5.5.2.3 Settings.............................................................................................................................................5-107
5.5.2.4 Synchrocheck states ..................................................................................................................5-108
5.5.2.5 Algorithm .........................................................................................................................................5-109
5.5.3 Autoreclose (79)..................................................................................................................5-113
5.5.3.1 Main autoreclose settings .......................................................................................................5-113
5.5.3.2 Autoreclose inputs.......................................................................................................................5-114
5.5.3.3 Autoreclose internal status .....................................................................................................5-115
5.5.3.4 General autoreclose status diagram..................................................................................5-116
5.5.3.5 Logic for blocking protection functions during reclose cycle .................................5-117
5.5.4 Breaker failure element (50BF) ...................................................................................5-119
5.5.5 VT fuse failure element (VTFF) ....................................................................................5-122
5.5.5.1 Fuse failure algorithm................................................................................................................5-122
5.5.6 Pulse counters ....................................................................................................................5-123
5.5.7 Analog comparators........................................................................................................ 5-125

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-5

 5.5.8 Maximum number of starts (66)................................................................................. 5-126
5.5.9 Digital counters.................................................................................................................. 5-128
5.5.10 Cold load pickup................................................................................................................ 5-130
5.5.11 60 CTS failure ...................................................................................................................... 5-131
5.5.12 Second harmonic inhibit................................................................................................ 5-133
5.6 Inputs/outputs ..............................................................................................5-136
5.6.1 Input/output placement ................................................................................................ 5-136
5.6.2 Control settings for input/output............................................................................... 5-137
5.6.3 Inputs...................................................................................................................................... 5-139
5.6.4 Outputs .................................................................................................................................. 5-141
5.6.4.1 Output status signals.................................................................................................................5-141
5.6.5 Circuit supervision and contact seal-in circuits ................................................. 5-143
5.6.5.1 Digital inputs..................................................................................................................................5-143
5.6.5.2 With trip circuit supervision ....................................................................................................5-143
5.6.5.3 Without supervision ...................................................................................................................5-145
5.6.5.4 With current supervision (with SEAL-IN) ...........................................................................5-145
5.6.5.5 With simple voltage supervision ..........................................................................................5-147
5.6.5.6 With double voltage supervision..........................................................................................5-150
5.6.5.7 With double voltage supervision and serial resistor in voltage monitors.........5-151
5.6.6 Analog board specific settings ................................................................................... 5-153
5.6.7 Virtual inputs ....................................................................................................................... 5-153
5.6.7.1 Virtual inputs writing..................................................................................................................5-153
5.6.7.2 Virtual inputs status monitoring:..........................................................................................5-153
5.6.8 Virtual outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-154
5.6.9 Virtual outputs latched................................................................................................... 5-154
5.7 Remote comms .............................................................................................5-155
5.8 Testing ............................................................................................................5-156
5.8.1 Force IO–input testing .................................................................................................... 5-156
5.8.2 Force IO–output testing ................................................................................................. 5-156
5.9 Relay configuration......................................................................................5-157
5.9.1 Outputs .................................................................................................................................. 5-157
5.9.2 LEDs......................................................................................................................................... 5-158
5.9.3 Operations............................................................................................................................ 5-159
5.9.3.1 Programming an operation....................................................................................................5-161
5.9.4 Protection elements......................................................................................................... 5-163
5.9.5 Control elements tab....................................................................................................... 5-164
5.9.6 Oscillography ...................................................................................................................... 5-165
5.9.7 Control events .................................................................................................................... 5-166
5.9.8 Switchgear ........................................................................................................................... 5-168
5.9.9 HMI (human-machine interface)................................................................................ 5-170
5.9.10 Device display selection................................................................................................. 5-174
5.9.10.1 Type of graphical display.........................................................................................................5-174
5.10 Logic configuration (PLC editor).................................................................5-176
5.10.1 Theory of operation ......................................................................................................... 5-177
5.10.1.1 Description......................................................................................................................................5-177
5.10.1.2 Logic compilation ........................................................................................................................5-180
5.10.2 Main menu ........................................................................................................................... 5-181
5.10.3 Configuration generation.............................................................................................. 5-182
5.10.3.1 Create new project .....................................................................................................................5-182
5.10.3.2 Create equation ...........................................................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.3 Add input to automation..........................................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.4 Add output to automation ......................................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.5 Add digital operation .................................................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.6 Link inputs, outputs, and operations ..................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.7 Add library.......................................................................................................................................5-183
5.10.4 Library generation............................................................................................................ 5-183
5.10.4.1 Library example............................................................................................................................5-184
5.10.5 Application example........................................................................................................ 5-185

1-6 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

 5.11 IEC 61850 configuration..............................................................................5-186
5.12 Procome configuration................................................................................5-189
5.13 IEC 60870-5-103 configuration ..................................................................5-194

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 Front panel ........................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1.1 LEDs .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Status.................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Operation bits status ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.2 Breaker status.......................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3 Protection status .................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.3.1 Protection blocks...............................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.3.2 Phase current .....................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3.3 Neutral current...................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3.4 Ground current ..................................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.3.5 Sensitive ground current...............................................................................................................6-5
6.2.3.6 Negative sequence current..........................................................................................................6-6
6.2.3.7 Thermal model ...................................................................................................................................6-6
6.2.3.8 Voltage...................................................................................................................................................6-7
6.2.3.9 Power ....................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.2.4 Control element status ........................................................................................................ 6-9
6.2.4.1 Frequency.............................................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.4.2 Synchrocheck .................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.2.4.3 Autoreclose....................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.4.4 Breaker failure................................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.4.5 VT fuse failure .................................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.4.6 Broken conductor .......................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.2.4.7 Setting groups ................................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.4.8 Locked rotor ..................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.4.9 Pulse counters................................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.2.4.10 Analog comparators .................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.4.11 Load encroachment ..................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.4.12 Maximum number of starts ...................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.4.13 Digital counters............................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.4.14 Cold load pickup............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.2.4.15 60CTS failure .................................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.4.16 2nd HRMC Inhibit ........................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.5 Protection & control status summary ........................................................................6-18
6.2.6 Snapshot event summary................................................................................................6-18
6.2.7 MODBUS user map ..............................................................................................................6-18
6.2.8 Switchgear status ................................................................................................................6-19
6.2.9 Calibration status .................................................................................................................6-20
6.2.10 FlexCurves ...............................................................................................................................6-21
6.2.11 System info..............................................................................................................................6-21
6.2.12 Record status .........................................................................................................................6-24
6.2.12.1 Fault reports..................................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.2.12.2 Control events ................................................................................................................................. 6-26
6.2.12.3 Oscillography ................................................................................................................................... 6-26
6.2.12.4 Data logger....................................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.2.12.5 Demand.............................................................................................................................................. 6-27
6.2.12.6 Energy ................................................................................................................................................. 6-27
6.2.12.7 Breaker maintenance .................................................................................................................. 6-28
6.2.13 IEEE 1588 precision time protocol (PTP).....................................................................6-29
6.2.14 Versions ....................................................................................................................................6-29
6.2.15 Redundancy............................................................................................................................6-31
6.3 Metering ........................................................................................................... 6-32
6.3.1 Primary values .......................................................................................................................6-32
6.3.1.1 Current ................................................................................................................................................ 6-32
6.3.1.2 Voltage................................................................................................................................................ 6-32

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-7

 6.3.1.3 Power ...................................................................................................................................................6-33
6.3.1.4 Energy ..................................................................................................................................................6-34
6.3.1.5 Demand ..............................................................................................................................................6-34
6.3.2 Secondary values.................................................................................................................6-35
6.3.2.1 Current.................................................................................................................................................6-35
6.3.2.2 Voltage ................................................................................................................................................6-35
6.3.2.3 Power ...................................................................................................................................................6-36
6.3.3 Phasor diagram .................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.3.4 Frequency................................................................................................................................ 6-38
6.4 Inputs / outputs ..............................................................................................6-39
6.4.1 Contact inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-39
6.4.2 Contact output status........................................................................................................ 6-39
6.4.3 Contact output operates.................................................................................................. 6-40
6.4.4 Contact output resets........................................................................................................ 6-41
6.4.5 I/O board status.................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.4.6 Virtual inputs .......................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.4.7 Virtual outputs....................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.4.8 Remote outputs .................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.4.9 Remote inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.4.10 Analog inputs......................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.4.11 Virtual output latched........................................................................................................ 6-45
6.4.12 RIOs ............................................................................................................................................ 6-45
6.5 Records.............................................................................................................6-46
6.5.1 Event recorder....................................................................................................................... 6-46
6.5.1.1 All snapshot events........................................................................................................................6-46
6.5.1.2 New snapshot events...................................................................................................................6-47
6.5.1.3 Control events ..................................................................................................................................6-47
6.5.1.4 Alarm panel .......................................................................................................................................6-48
6.5.2 Waveform capture.............................................................................................................. 6-49
6.5.3 Fault report ............................................................................................................................. 6-50
6.5.4 Data logger............................................................................................................................. 6-51

7 IEC 61850 7.1 IEC 61850 Overview.......................................................................................... 7-1

PROTOCOL 7.2 IEC 61850 generic substation state event (GSSE) ....................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2 Remote communication......................................................................................................7-2
7.2.3 GSSE configuration ................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.4 Remote inputs ..........................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.5 Remote outputs .......................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.5.1 DNA bit pairs ....................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.5.2 UserSt bit pairs................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3 IEC 61850 profile for F650 ............................................................................... 7-7
7.3.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................7-7
7.3.1.1 Scope and outline of IEC 61850................................................................................................. 7-8
7.3.2 Communication profiles ......................................................................................................7-9
7.3.3 TCP connection timing..........................................................................................................7-9
7.3.4 MMS protocol............................................................................................................................7-9
7.3.5 Peer-to-peer communication ...........................................................................................7-9
7.3.6 File services................................................................................................................................7-9
7.3.7 IEC 61850 conformance statements.......................................................................... 7-10
7.3.7.1 Abbreviations and acronyms....................................................................................................7-10
7.3.7.2 Definitions of the ISO/OSI reference model .......................................................................7-10
7.3.7.3 Conformance statements for F650 devices ......................................................................7-11
7.4 IEC 61850 FUNCTIONALITY..........................................................................7-208
7.4.1 Client Connections ........................................................................................................... 7-208
7.4.2 GOOSES ................................................................................................................................. 7-208

1-8 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

 7.4.2.1 TRANSMISSION GOOSES ...........................................................................................................7-208
7.4.2.2 RECEPTION GOOSES ...................................................................................................................7-208
7.4.3 IEC 61850 Server................................................................................................................7-208
7.4.3.1 LOGICAL DEVICES AND REPORTS..........................................................................................7-208
7.5 IEC 61850 Status...........................................................................................7-209
7.5.1 GOOSES Status ...................................................................................................................7-209
7.5.2 IEC 61850 CID Status .......................................................................................................7-210
7.6 IEC 61850 Configurator ...............................................................................7-213
7.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................................7-213
7.6.2 Online/Offline operation modes.................................................................................7-213
7.6.3 IEC 61850 configurator details ...................................................................................7-214
7.6.3.1 IEC 61850 configurator interface. ........................................................................................7-215
7.6.3.2 Configuration of setting groups............................................................................................7-247

8 SECURITY 8.1 Security level for firmware versions prior to 9.00...................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Adding users............................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Changing passwords............................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.3 Enabling security .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 Logging into EnerVista 650 Setup .................................................................................. 8-3
8.2 Security level for firmware versions 9.00 and higher............................... 8-4
8.2.1 Cybersecurity Overview ...................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.2 Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.4 Authentication Methods ..................................................................................................8-14
8.2.5 Secure communication ....................................................................................................8-17
8.2.6 Other Features......................................................................................................................8-18
8.2.7 Product Hardening .............................................................................................................8-21
8.2.8 Security Logging - Syslog ................................................................................................8-25
8.2.9 LOST PASSWORD ..................................................................................................................8-25

9 BOOTCODE AND 9.1 Firmware upgrade versions below 7.00. ...................................................... 9-1
FIRMWARE 9.1.1 Communication parameters ............................................................................................ 9-3
UPGRADE 9.1.2 Bootware version upgrade ................................................................................................ 9-4
9.1.2.1 Bootware upgrade ...........................................................................................................................9-4
9.1.3 Firmware version upgrade ..............................................................................................9-12
9.1.3.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.1.3.2 Firmware upgrade......................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.1.4 Summary of main steps ....................................................................................................9-20
9.1.4.1 Boot code upgrade (*).................................................................................................................. 9-21
9.1.4.2 Firmware upgrade(*) .................................................................................................................... 9-21
9.2 Firmware upgrade version 7.00 or above.................................................. 9-22
9.2.1 Communication parameters ..........................................................................................9-22
9.2.2 Firmware version upgrade ..............................................................................................9-23
9.2.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 9-23
9.2.2.2 Firmware upgrade......................................................................................................................... 9-23
9.2.2.3 Order code upgrade process ................................................................................................... 9-26
9.2.3 Summary of main firmware upgrade steps ............................................................9-28

10 COMMISSIONING 10.1 Visual inspection ............................................................................................ 10-1

10.2 Out of service setting .................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 General considerations, power supply network....................................... 10-3
10.4 Isolation tests.................................................................................................. 10-4
10.5 Indicators......................................................................................................... 10-5
10.6 Power supply testing ..................................................................................... 10-5
10.7 Communications ............................................................................................ 10-5

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-9

 10.8 Verification of measurement .......................................................................10-6
10.8.1 Voltages.................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.8.2 Phase currents ...................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.8.3 Active, reactive power, and COSJ metering ............................................................ 10-7
10.8.4 Frequency................................................................................................................................ 10-8
10.9 Inputs and outputs.........................................................................................10-9
10.9.1 Digital inputs .......................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.9.2 Contact outputs................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.9.3 Circuit continuity supervision inputs........................................................................ 10-10
10.9.4 Latching circuits ................................................................................................................ 10-10
10.10 Connections for testing protection elements ........................................10-11
10.11 Instantaneous overcurrent (50PH, 50PL, 50N, 50G, 50SG) ...................10-12
10.12 Time overcurrent (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G, 46) .........................................10-13
10.13 Directional elements (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG)............................................10-14
10.13.1 67P element......................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.13.2 67N element........................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.13.3 67G element........................................................................................................................ 10-15
10.13.4 67SG element ..................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.14 Undervoltage elements (27P, 27X)............................................................10-17
10.14.1 27P element......................................................................................................................... 10-17
10.14.2 27X element ........................................................................................................................ 10-17
10.15 Overvoltage elements (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47).................................10-18
10.15.1 59P element......................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.15.2 59X element ........................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.15.3 59NH and 59NL elements............................................................................................. 10-19
10.15.4 47 element - Neg Seq OV.............................................................................................. 10-19
10.16 Frequency elements (81O/81U) ................................................................10-21
10.17 Recloser (79)..................................................................................................10-22
10.17.1 Reclosing cycle................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.17.2 Recloser status................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.17.3 External reclose initiation.............................................................................................. 10-23
10.18 Thermal image element (49)......................................................................10-24

11 APPLICATION 11.1 Example 1: Communication & protection settings...................................11-1

EXAMPLES 11.1.1 Description.............................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.2 Communicate with the relay .......................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.3 Set the protection function ............................................................................................. 11-3
11.1.4 Test .............................................................................................................................................11-4
11.2 Example 2: TOC protection & reclosing settings......................................11-5
11.2.1 Description.............................................................................................................................. 11-5
11.2.2 Communicate with the relay .......................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.3 Set the protection function ............................................................................................. 11-5
11.2.4 Set the recloser ..................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.2.5 Set the synchrocheck......................................................................................................... 11-6
11.3 Example 3: Set an operation.........................................................................11-8
11.3.1 Description.............................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.3.2 Procedure ................................................................................................................................ 11-8
11.3.3 Test .......................................................................................................................................... 11-10

12 FREQUENTLY ASKED 12.1 Communications.............................................................................................12-1

QUESTIONS 12.2 Protection ........................................................................................................12-3
12.3 Control & HMI ..................................................................................................12-4
12.4 Relay configuration........................................................................................12-6

1-10 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

13 F650 13.1 Symptoms and recommended actions ...................................................... 13-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE

A LOGIC OPERANDS A.1 Operands - F650 - model FX - GX ...................................................................A-1

B MODBUS PROTOCOL B.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... B-1

B.2 MODBUS F650 ................................................................................................... B-1
B.2.1 Implemented MODBUS functionality ............................................................................ B-1
B.2.2 Physical layer ........................................................................................................................... B-2
B.2.2.1 Serial layer............................................................................................................................................B-2
B.2.2.2 B.2.2.2 TCP/IP layer...........................................................................................................................B-2
B.2.3 Data link layer .......................................................................................................................... B-2
B.2.4 Generic reading....................................................................................................................... B-3
B.2.5 Generic writing ........................................................................................................................ B-4
B.2.6 Function codes ........................................................................................................................ B-5
B.2.7 Exception and error responses........................................................................................ B-6
B.3 Data type ........................................................................................................... B-6
B.4 MODBUS data.................................................................................................... B-7
B.4.1 Data management ................................................................................................................ B-7
B.4.2 Writing settings ....................................................................................................................... B-7
B.4.3 Snapshot events ..................................................................................................................... B-7
B.4.4 Operations .............................................................................................................................. B-10
B.4.5 Force outputs of IO boards............................................................................................. B-11
B.4.6 Control events....................................................................................................................... B-11
B.4.6.1 Event structure................................................................................................................................ B-12
B.4.6.2 Event collection process............................................................................................................. B-13
B.4.6.3 Control events from the command line .............................................................................. B-14
B.4.6.4 Event status request (alarms)................................................................................................... B-14
B.4.6.5 Acknowledging alarms................................................................................................................ B-15
B.4.7 Write virtual inputs ............................................................................................................. B-15
B.4.8 User map................................................................................................................................. B-15
B.4.9 Retrieve oscillography....................................................................................................... B-16
B.4.10 Time synchronization ........................................................................................................ B-16
B.4.11 Queuing messages............................................................................................................. B-17
B.4.12 Traces and troubleshooting ........................................................................................... B-17
B.4.13 MODBUS CRC generation function ............................................................................. B-17
B.5 Memory map ...................................................................................................B-20

C DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL C.1 DNP 3.0 protocol settings ...............................................................................C-1

FOR F650 C.2 DNP 3.0 device profile document ..................................................................C-4
C.3 Implementation table ......................................................................................C-7
C.4 Binary input points ........................................................................................C-11
C.5 DNP configuration examples .......................................................................C-12
C.5.1 Configuring DNP user map ............................................................................................. C-12
C.5.2 Example of custom binary input points map......................................................... C-14
C.5.3 Multiple DNP 3.0 masters communication with F650........................................ C-15
C.6 Binary output and control relay output ....................................................C-16
C.7 Binary counters ..............................................................................................C-17
C.8 Analog inputs ..................................................................................................C-18

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-11

D IEC 60870-5-104 D.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... D-1
PROTOCOL D.2 Technical description...................................................................................... D-1
D.3 Basic application functions ........................................................................... D-1
D.4 IEC 104 settings ............................................................................................... D-2
D.5 IEC 60870-5-104 point list .............................................................................. D-8
D.6 IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability ................................................................. D-8

E PROCOME E.1 PROCOME protocol........................................................................................... E-1

PROTOCOL

F IEC 60870-5-103 F.1 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol................................................................................ F-1

PROTOCOL F.1.1 Interoperability document..................................................................................................F-1
F.1.2 Application level ......................................................................................................................F-6

G REDUNDANCY G.1 PRP and HSR Ethernet protocols................................................................... G-1

PROTOCOL G.1.1 PRP................................................................................................................................................ G-4
G.1.2 HSR ............................................................................................................................................... G-5
G.2 RSTP (IEEE 802.1D-2004) and daisy chain ................................................... G-6
G.2.1 RSTP description..................................................................................................................... G-6
G.2.2 RSTP concepts ......................................................................................................................... G-6
G.2.3 Use in meshed networks .................................................................................................... G-7
G.2.4 Daisy chain................................................................................................................................ G-7
G.3 Link loss alert (LLA).......................................................................................... G-8
G.3.1 LLA ................................................................................................................................................ G-8
G.3.2 LLA priority ................................................................................................................................ G-8
G.3.3 LLA timeout............................................................................................................................... G-8

H FACTORY DEFAULT H.1 Factory default logic...................................................................................... H-2

LOGIC

I FACTORY DEFAULT I.1 Factory default settings.................................................................................. I-1

CONFIGURATION

J MISCELLANEOUS J.1 Warranty............................................................................................................ J-1

J.2.1 Major Updates.......................................................................................................................... J-2

1-12 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

GE
Grid Solutions

F650 Digital Bay Controller

Chapter 1: Getting Started

GETTING STARTED

1.1 Important procedures

Use this chapter for initial setup of your new F650 Digital Bay Controller.

1.1.1 Cautions and warnings

To help ensure years of trouble free operation, please read through the following chapter for information to help guide you
through the initial installation procedures of your new relay.
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all warnings and cautions in this manual are reviewed to
help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
NOTICE

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-1

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.1.1.1 General cautions and warnings

The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.

Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk of shock
WARNING and/or fire, for example such as can arise from high voltage connected to low voltage terminals.
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type, terminal torque settings, voltage,
current magnitudes applied, and adequate isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are uncompromised for safety purposes during device operation and service.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage input match the ratings specified on
the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or voltage in excess of the specified limits.
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety
cautions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers, voltage
transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to
attempting work on the device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current transformers. Make sure that
current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out before making or removing any connection to the current
transformer (CT) input terminals of the device.
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages or currents are connected to such
equipment and that trip and close commands to the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are isolated,
unless this is required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and other switching
apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are
working on or around this primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Uses an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.

LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M
WARNING devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial
NOTICE environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.

Figure 1-1: Front view of F650 unit

1-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.1.2 Communication board withdrawal/insertion

MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION SHALL ONLY BE PERFORMED BY DULY QUALIFIED

WARNING SERVICE PERSONNEL. FOR PERSONAL SECURITY PURPOSES, BEFORE ACCOMPLISHING ANY
WITHDRAWAL OR INSERTION OPERATION, THE RELAY MUST BE POWERED OFF AND ALL THE REAR
TERMINALS MUST BE POTENTIAL FREE. THE RELAY MUST BE GROUNDED USING THE REAR
GROUNDING SCREW.

The modular design of the relay allows for the withdrawal and insertion of the communication module.
Figure 1-2: Module withdrawal/insertion shows the location of communication modules on the rear part of the relay.
Qualified personnel must carry out the insertion or extraction of the communication boards only after disconnecting the
relay auxiliary voltage and ensuring that all the rear terminals are potential free.
Communication boards are installed on the rear of the unit, with upper port reserved for the asynchronous
communications board and CAN bus, and the lower port for the ETHERNET board. (The Ethernet module can be withdrawn
or inserted only in models with Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2: "B", "C", "D" or "E". For the remaining options,
Ethernet communications are included in the main CPU).

Before performing any of these actions, control power must be removed from the relay and all the rear terminals must
be potential free. A grounded anti static wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid
electrostatic discharges that may cause damage to the electronic components.
WITHDRAWAL: Loosen the small screws that keep the faceplate in place and extract the module.
INSERTION: Insert the module and press it firmly in the case, until it is completely fixed. After this, bolt the faceplate
screws and replace the control power. Check that the relay is fully operative.

Figure 1-2: Module withdrawal/insertion

GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage to the relay, connected equipment or personnel whenever these
safety rules are not followed.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-3

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.1.1.3 Magnetic module terminals

The transformer module for the VTs and CTs is already connected to a female connector screwed to the case. The current
inputs incorporate shorting bars, so that the module can be extracted without the need to short-circuit the currents
externally. It is very important, for safety reasons, not to change or switch the terminals for CTs and VTs.

Figure 1-3: Rear view of F650 unit

GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage of the relay, connected equipment or personnel whenever
these safety rules are not followed.

1-4 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.2 Inspection checklist

1. Unwrap the relay and inspect the relay for physical damage.
2. View the nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered and delivered. The model number is at the
top.

Figure 1-4: Identification label (A4454P6)

Please ensure that you received the following items with your relay:
• Mounting screws for fixing the relay to a cabinet
• GE EnerVista™ DVD (includes the EnerVista 650 Setup software and manuals in PDF format)
• Wiring diagram.
• Certificate of Compliance
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin Home
Page: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-5

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

Note: If there is any physical damage detected on the relay, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact
GE Grid Solutions, Multilin immediately:

EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA:

GE Grid Solutions
Av. Pinoa, 10
48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya (SPAIN)
Tel.: (34) 94-485 88 54
Fax: (34) 94-485 88 38
E-mail: [email protected]

AMERICA, ASIA AND AUSTRALIA:

GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
North America toll-free: +1 800 547 8629
Tel.: +1 905 927 7070
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
E-mail: [email protected]

The information provided herein is not intended to cover all the details of the variations of the
CAUTION equipment, nor does it take into account the circumstances that may be present in your
installation, operating or maintenance activities.
Should you wish to receive additional information, or for any particular problem that cannot be solved by referring to the
information contained herein, please contact General Electric, Grid Solutions.

1-6 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.3 Safety instructions

The F650 ground screw shown in Figure 1-5: Location of grounding screw must be correctly grounded.

Figure 1-5: Location of grounding screw

Before communicating with the F650 through the front USB port, ensure that the computer's power supply is grounded.
When using a laptop, it is recommended that the power supply be disconnected. In many cases the laptop may not be
correctly grounded either due to the power supply or to the connector cables used.

GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage to the relay or connected equipment when this basic safety rule
is not followed.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-7

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.1.3.1 General safety instructions

CAUTION
• Failure to practice safe working procedures is likely to damage the equipment, cause severe injury and/or death.
• The use of appropriate safety gloves, safety glasses and protective clothing are recommended during equipment
installation, maintenance and service of the equipment.
• All procedures must be strictly adhered to.
• Failure to observe and follow the instructions provided in the equipment manual(s) could cause irreversible
damage to the equipment and could lead to property damage, personal injury and/or death.
• Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and caution indicators are reviewed.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or functions abnormally, proceed with
caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired and can result in Impaired
operation and injury.
• Beware of potential hazards, wear personal protective equipment and carefully inspect the work area for tools
and objects that may have been left inside the equipment.
• Caution: Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.
• Test/Installation/Service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices, safety precautions and
follow standard ESD precautions to avoid personal injury or equipment damage.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device or associated circuits, isolate
or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources of electric power.
• Failure to shut equipment power off prior to removing the power connections could expose you to dangerous
voltages causing injury or death.
• All recommended equipment that should be grounded must have a reliable and uncompromised grounding path
for safety purposes, protection against electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
• Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility's main ground system for primary
power.
• Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
• At all times, equipment ground terminal must be grounded during device operation.
• While the equipment manual may suggest several safety and reliability steps, safety precautions must be used
in conjunction with the safety codes in force at your location.
• LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M devices are
considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
• It is the responsibility of the user to check the equipment ratings and installation instructions prior to
commissioning, service.
• Use a lift system with side rails/bucket to reduce a fall hazard as opposed to other means when installing or
servicing.
• In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made must respect the applicable local
jurisdiction electrical code.
• Before working on CTs, they must be short circuited.
• Do not remove the voltage terminal blocks or disconnect the voltage input wires when the voltage phases are
live. The voltage inputs must be de-energized prior to any servicing.

1-8 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1.1.3.2 Warning symbols

The following table explains the meaning of warning symbols that may appear on the device or in this manual.

The relevant circuit is direct current.

Le circuit principal est à courant continu.
The relevant circuit is alternating current.
Le circuit principal est à courant alternatif.
CAUTION: Refer to the documentation for important operating and maintenance

!
instructions. Failure to take or avoid a specified action can result in loss of data or
physical damage.
AVERTISSEMENT: Se réferer à la documentation pour l'entretien et l'utilisation.
L'absence ou èviter de prender des mesures spècifiques peut entraîner des pertes
de données ou même causer des dommages physiques.
WARNING! Dangerous voltage constituting a risk of electric shock is present
within the unit. Failure to take or avoid a specified action can result in physical
harm to the user.
AVERTISSEMENT! Tensions dangereuses comportant un risque de choc électrique
sont presents dans l'equipement. L'absence ou èviter de prender des mesures
spècifiques peut causer des dommages physiques à l'utilisateur.
CAUTION: Class 1M Laser (IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser products)
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS.
AVERTISSEMENT: Laser de classe 1M (IEC60825-1) ÉVITER DE REGARDER
DIRECTEMENT LE DISPOSITIF QUI ÉMET LE LASER OPTIQUE.
CAUTION: Hot surface.
AVERTISSEMENT: Surface chaude.

Earth (Ground) Terminal.

Terminal de terre (masse).

Protective Earth Terminal.

Terminal de terre de protection.

Note: Read all instructions included in package before using your product. Additional safety information
Product Safety Supplement document available at; http://www.gegridsolutions.com/ProductSafety/

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-9

1.2 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.2 Overview
1.2.1 Introduction to the 650 family of relays
The GE 650 family relay is a new generation of digital and multifunction equipment that is easily incorporated into
automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels.

1.2.2 Hardware architecture

1.2.2.1 F650 basic design

The 650 is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The 650 family can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming
device, or another 650 device.
The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as
programming logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input Elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The 650 isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output Elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital signals that can be used to
control field devices.
Figure 1-6: 650 concept block diagram

1-10 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.2 OVERVIEW

1.2.2.2 F650 signal type

Contact Inputs/Outputs: Digital signals.
CT and VT inputs: Signals coming from the inputs of current and voltage transformers, used for monitoring the power
system signals.
Remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs: Signals associated with physical input/output contacts from a Remote Digital Input/
Output Module (CIO) connected to the 650 unit via the CAN Bus existing in options X, Y, Z, C and M for rear serial
communication board 1.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. Control module that enables the unit configuration (assignment of inputs/outputs)
and the implementation of logic circuits.
Protection Elements: Relay protection elements, for example: Overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.
Remote inputs and outputs: Provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote devices using IEC
61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.
Analog Inputs: Signals associated with transducers.

1.2.3 Communications architecture

A dedicated serial port is used for communication between the main processor and the human-machine interface. The
serial connection provides immunity against electromagnetic disturbances, thus increasing system safety.
All 650 units incorporate one RS232 (USB or DB9)serial port on the front of the relay. They can also incorporate up to two
additional communication modules on the rear.
One of the modules provides asynchronous serial communications, using different physical media (RS485 + cable remote
CAN bus I/O, plastic or glass fiber optic) depending on the selected model. The module incorporates two identical ports,
COM1 and COM2. The COM2 port is multiplexed with the front port. Additionally, this module may incorporate a port for
CAN bus communications, used for the connection to the remote CAN Bus I/O module. This feature increases the I/O
capability by up to 100% if the maximum number of I/Os available inside the relay is not enough for a specific application.
Available options are:
Table 1-1: Rear serial communications board 1
Board Code Functionality
F Without additional communication ports
A Two RS485 ports
P Two Plastic F.O. ports
G Two Glass F.O. ports
X Two RS485 ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs
Y Two Plastic F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs (fiber)
Z Two Glass F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs (fiber)
C CAN port for remote CAN Bus I/O (cable)
M RS485 + RS485 port and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus I/O (cable)

The other module provides Ethernet communications (ETH Port), using 10/100BaseTX (self-negotiable speed) or 100BaseFX
connectors, depending on the selected model. The most complete models include a double redundant 100BaseFX fiber
optic port. Redundancy is provided at the physical level, for options D and E; the unit incorporates internally duplicated and
independent controllers for extended system reliability and accessibility.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-11

1.2 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

Available Options are:

Table 1-2: REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
Board Code Functionality
B One 10/100BaseTX port (self-negotiable speed)
C One 10/100BaseTX port and one 100BaseFX port.
D One 10/100BaseTX port and redundant 100BaseFX ports
E Redundant 10/100BaseTX ports

For options C and D you must select the active physical media, by means of an internal selector inside the module. The
factory configuration for this selection is the 10/100BaseTX port. For firmware versions 7.00 and above, the following
options are available:

G 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base TX

H 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base FX
J PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
K PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
L PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base TX
M PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base TX

Finally, internal communication with input and output modules is performed via an internal CAN Bus, independent of the
one used for remote CAN Bus I/Os. This provides increased communication speed, and acknowledgment of modules,
abnormalities, etc. As this is a serial port supporting a communications protocol, it provides immunity against external or
internal disturbances.

1-12 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.2 OVERVIEW

CAN COM1 COM2

ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS

CAN
REMOTE
ETH1 Redundancy I/O
(Optional)

SERIAL
MAIN PROCESSOR COM 1
DIGITAL SUPERVISION
ETH2 ETH3
COMMUNICATION
CONTROL I/O I/O
PROTECTION
CAN I/O
INTERNAL

SERIAL MULTIPLEXED
SERIAL COM 2
DSP COM H
MEASUREMENT
PROCESSOR

ANALOG
SERIAL
INPUTS COM2
COM H
CURENT AC
AND FRONT
VOLTAGE AC HMI HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE SERIAL
PORT

Figure 1-7: Communications architecture (B6816F2)

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-13

1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.3 EnerVista 650 Setup software

1.3.1 System requirements
The relay front panel or the EnerVista 650 Setup software can be used to communicate with the relay. The software
interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the computer monitor can display more
information.
The minimum system requirements for the EnerVista 650 Setup software are as follows:
• Pentium® 4 (Core Duo recommended).
• Windows® XP with Service Pack 2 (Service Pack 3 recommended), Windows 7, Windows 8 or Windows 10
• 1 GB of RAM (2 GB recommended).
• 500 MB free hard drive space (1 GB recommended).
• 1024 x 768 display (1280 x 800 recommended).
• RS232 and USB serial and/or Ethernet port for communications with the relay.

1.3.2 Installation
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista 650 Setup are met (see previous section), obtain the
software from the GE EnerVista DVD, or download from: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/ as follows:
1. Insert the GE EnerVista DVD into the DVD drive of your computer.
2. Click Install Now and follow the installation instructions to install the complimentary EnerVista software.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click IED Setup in the Launch Pad window.

Figure 1-8: Launchpad window

1-14 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

5. Click Add Product and select the “F650 Bay Controller” relay from the Install Software window as shown below. Select
the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release, or select “CD” if you do not have a web connection, then
click Add Now to list software items for the F650.

Figure 1-9: Add Product window

6. EnerVista Launchpad obtains the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, double-
click the installation program to install the EnerVista 650 Setup software.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the EnerVista 650 Setup software. When the Welcome window appears,
click Next to continue with the installation.

Figure 1-10: EnerVista 650 Setup installation

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-15

1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

8. When the Choose Destination Location window is displayed, change the installation directory id needed by clicking
Change… and typing in the complete path name including the new directory name. Click Next to continue with the
installation.

Figure 1-11: EnerVista 650 Setup installation cont.

9. The default program group containing the application is added to as shown in the Selected Program Folder window.
Click Next to begin the installation process, and all the necessary program files are copied into the selected directory.

Figure 1-12: Select program folder

1-16 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

10. To complete the installation, select the desired language for startup.

Figure 1-13: Language window

11. Click Finish to end the installation. The F650 device has been added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.

Figure 1-14: EnerVista Launchpad

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-17

1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.3.3 Connecting EnerVista 650 Setup to the F650

This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the EnerVista 650 Setup software. Refer to section 4.1 in this manual
for more information about the EnerVista 650 Setup software interface.

1.3.3.1 Configuring an Ethernet connection

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 650 Setup software (available from the GE EnerVista DVD or online
from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin (see previous section for installation instructions).
2. Go to Communication > Computer.
3. Select Control Type as MODBUS TCP/IP from the drop-down list. This option displays a number of interface
parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet communications.
4. Enter the relay IP address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network > IP Address) in the
IP Address field in MODBUS TCP/IP SETUP.
5. Enter the relay ModBus address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol >
ModBus Address COM1/COM2 setting) in the Unit Identifier (Slave Address) field.
6. Enter the ModBus port address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol >
ModBus Port Number setting) in the ModBus Port field.
7. The Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Click ON to begin communicating.

1.3.3.2 Configuring the RS232 connection

Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable, or the USB Cable, is properly connected to the RS232port or the USB port
on the front panel of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 650 Setup software (available from the GE EnerVista DVD or online
from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/index.htm (see previous section for installation instructions).
2. Go to Communication > Computer and enter the following data referred to communications:
3. Under Control Type select No Control Type from the drop-down list.
4. Enter the relay Slave Address (Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol) in the Slave
Address field. The default value is 254.
5. Enter the physical communications parameters (Baud rate and parity settings) from the Setpoint > Product Setup >
Communication Settings > Serial Ports menu. Default values are 19200 for baud rate and none for parity.
6. The unit has now been configured for RS232 communications. Click ON to begin communicating.

1-18 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.4 650 HARDWARE

1.4 650 hardware

1.4.1 Mounting & wiring
Refer to Chapter 3. Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions.

1.4.2 650 communications

The EnerVista 650 Setup software communicates with the relay via the faceplate USB port in hardware 04 (E in order code)
or RS232 port or the rear RS485/Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight-
through” serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected
to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in Figure 1-15: Relay- PC connection for RS232 front port. To communicate via
USB port a male A / male B USB shielded wire is needed
To communicate via the F650 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a “straight-through” serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22 or 24 AWG according to American standards; 0.25, 0.34 or 0.5 mm2 according to European standards)
connects the F485 converter to the F650 rear communication port.
To minimize communication errors that can be caused by external noise, a shielded twisted pair is recommended. In order
to avoid loops where external currents can flow, the cable shield must be grounded at one end only.
The converter box (-, +, GND) terminals are connected to the relay (SDA, SDB, GND) terminals respectively. For long
communications cables (longer than 1 km), the RS485 circuit must be terminated in an RC network (i.e. 120 ohm, 1 nF). This
circuit is shown in Figure 1-16: RS485 connection for 650 units, associated with the text Zt(*).

Figure 1-15: Relay- PC connection for RS232 front port

To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. For correct operation, polarity must
be respected, although a different polarity will not damage the unit. For instance, the relays must be connected with all
RS485 SDA terminals connected together, and all SDB terminals connected together. This may result in confusion, as the
RS485 standard refers to terminals “A” and “B”, although many devices use terminals labeled “+” and “-“.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-19

1.4 650 HARDWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

As a general rule, terminals labeled “A” should be connected to terminals “-“, and terminals “B” to “+”. The GND terminal
should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. Otherwise, it should be connected to the shield.
Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next relay in the system. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this
manner without exceeding driver capability; for larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible
to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel. Do not use other connection
configurations.
Lightening strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are provided internally. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.

Figure 1-16: RS485 connection for 650 units

To communicate through the F650 rear Ethernet port from a PC, a crossover cable is required. If the connection is
performed through a hub or a switch, a direct Ethernet cable is required.

1.4.3 Faceplate display

All messages are displayed on a 20x4 character LCD display. An optional graphic display is also available. Messages are
displayed in different languages depending on the model and configuration settings.

1-20 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.4 650 HARDWARE

1.4.4 Maintenance

1.4.4.1 General maintenance

The F650 requires minimum maintenance once it is commissioned into service. F650 is a microprocessor based relay and
its characteristics do not change over time; as such no further functional tests are required. While the F650 performs
continual self-tests, it is recommended that maintenance be scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance
can involve in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin or one of its representative for
prompt service.

1.4.4.2 In-service maintenance

1. Visual verification of the analog value integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices in the
system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages and LED indications.
3. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust or loose wires.
4. Event recorder file download with further event analysis.

1.4.4.3 Out-of-service maintenance

1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog value (current, voltages, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated test
equipment is required.
3. Protection element setpoint verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against
relay settings).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.

To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
NOTICE state once per year, for one hour continuously.

1.4.4.4 Unscheduled maintenance

Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:
• View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs and elements.

1.4.5 Storage
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow the storage temperature range
outlined in the Specifications.

To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
NOTICE state once per year, for one hour continuously.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-21

1.4 650 HARDWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED

1.4.6 Repairs
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
• Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
• Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
• Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
• Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or Styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to cushion
the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of
cushioning material.
• Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
• Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department. Customers are responsible for
shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm

1.4.7 Disposal
The F650 is intended to be part of defective large-scale stationary industrial tools and large-scale fixed installations. This
product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. For proper recycling return this
product to your supplier or a designated collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.

1-22 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

GE
Grid Solutions

F650 Digital Bay Controller

Chapter 2: Product Description

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 F650 Overview

F650 is a protection, control, monitoring, metering and registering unit, suitable for many different applications, such as
main protection for distribution feeders and transmission lines, as well as backup protection for transformers, busbars,
capacitor banks, etc.
Overvoltage and undervoltage protection, overfrequency and underfrequency protection, breaker failure protection,
directional current supervision fault diagnostics and programmable logic functions are provided.
This relay also provides phase, neutral, ground and sensitive ground, instantaneous and time overcurrent protection. The
time overcurrent function provides multiple curve shapes or FlexCurves™ for optimum co-ordination. Automatic reclosing,
synchrocheck, and line fault locator features are also provided.
Voltage, current, power, and energy metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available
as true RMS magnitude, or as RMS magnitude of fundamental frequency and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include a sequence of records. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an
IRIG-B signal or via SNTP, DNP or Modbus protocol over the Ethernet port. From firmware version 7.00 and above, IEEE
1588 time protocol is also available. Precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the
system. Oscillography data capture may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing
on a personal computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the
event of a system fault.
A faceplate RS232 or USB port may be used to connect to a PC for programming settings and monitoring actual values.
A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering personnel. All serial ports use the Modbus® RTU protocol. Optional communications modules include a
100BaseFX Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-1

2.1 F650 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Another option provides two 100BaseFX fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus®/
TCP, DNP 3.0 and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser. The IEC 60870-5-104
protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. The Ethernet port also supports the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) and
High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) of IEC 62439-3 (clause 4 (PRP) and clause 5 (HSR)) for firmware version 7.00
and so on.
Rear port COM1 can be set to support IEC60870-5-103 protocol
The F650 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added:

Figure 2-1: FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

2-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS

2.2 ANSI device numbers and functions

Main features available in the relay are gathered in tables below

DEVICE NUMBER PROTECTION & CONTROL FUNCTIONS

25 Synchronism Check
27/27X Bus/Line Undervoltage
32 Sensitive Directional Power
32FP Forward Power
32N Wattmetric Zero-Sequence Directional
46 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent
47 Negative Sequence Voltage
48 Locked Rotor
49 Thermal Image - overload protection
50 BF Breaker Failure
50PH/PL Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (High/Low)
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
50SG Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent for sensitive ground systems (measured from 5th current
transformer input)
50IG Isolated Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (measured from 5th current transformer input)
51N Neutral Time Overcurrent
51G Ground Time Overcurrent
51SG Sensitive Ground Time Overcurrent
51PH/V Voltage Restraint Phase Time Overcurrent
51PL/V Voltage Restraint Phase Time Overcurrent
59/59X Bus/Line Overvoltage
59NH/NL Neutral Overvoltage - High/Low
67P Phase Directional Overcurrent
67N Neutral Directional Overcurrent
67SG Sensitive Ground Directional Overcurrent
79 Autoreclose (Four shot recloser)
81 U/O Under/Over Frequency Broken Conductor Detection
N/A Load Encroachment
N/A Broken Conductor
81df/dt Frequency Rate of Change
VTFF VT Fuse Failure Detection
60CTS Failure Current Transformer Failure **
2nd Harmonic Second Harmonic Inhibit **
Inhibit

** These functions are available for firmware version 7.50 or above

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-3

2.3 OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.3 Other device functions

INPUTS/OUTPUTS METERING COMMUNICATIONS

9 Analog Inputs: Metering Current for phases, ground and Front RS232 port, USB port in HMI
5 current inputs (3 for phases, 1 for ground, 1 sensitive ground inputs option E, Two rear RS485/fibre optic
for sensitive ground), ports, 10/100 TX and 100 FX Mbps
4 voltage inputs (3 for phases, 1 for busbar or Ethernet port
auxiliary voltage)
Digital Programmable Contact Inputs (up to Voltages phase to phase and phase to ModBus Communications RTU and
64) ground over TCP/IP
Digital Programmable Contact Outputs (up to Real, Reactive and Apparent Power and DNP Multimaster (3.0 Level 2)
16) Power Factor
32 Latched Virtual Inputs Three Phase Energy IEC 870-5-104
32 Self-Reset Virtual Inputs
Virtual Outputs (up to 512) Frequency ModBus User Map
Tripping and closing circuit supervision Sequence components of currents and IEC 61850 protocol
voltages
Remote Inputs/Outputs (GSSE and GOOSE Pulse Counters IEC 870-5-103 protocol
messages)
Analog Inputs (dCmA) Analog Comparators
*Digital Counters

*This functionality is available from firmware version 7.00

USER INTERFACE RECORDS OTHERS

Alphanumerical display (4x20) Data Logger Breaking Arcing Current (I2t)
Graphic display (16 x 40) Demand Breaker Control
User Programmable LEDs (15) Event Recorder (up to 128 configurable IRIG-B synchronization/SNTP/
events) IEEE 1588
User Programmable Keys (up to 5) Fault Locator and Fault report (up to 10 Logic Equations (PLC Editor)
records)
Easy menu management Oscillography (up to 20 records) Operations (up to 24)
Configurable One-Line Diagram (Graphic Snapshot Events (up to 1023)** Web Server Application
model only)
Phasor Diagram (available in EnerVista 650
Setup)

** Maximum number of events can vary depend on firmware version. See details in section 2.5.3.3

2-4 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 ORDER CODES

2.4 Order codes

F650 units are supplied as ½ 19” rack, 6 units high, containing the following modules: power supply, CPU, I/O modules,
communication modules. The required information to completely define an F650 model is shown on Table 2–1:
Table 2-1: Order codes
F650 - - - F - G - - - - - DESCRIPTION
B Basic Display (See Note 2)
M Graphic Display with Standard Symbols (See Note 2)
N Graphic Display with IEC symbols (See Note 2)
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 1
F None
A Redundant RS485
P Redundant plastic fiber optic (**)
G Redundant glass fiber optic
X Redundant RS485 + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Y Redundant plastic fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O (**)
Z Redundant glass fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
C Cable Remote CAN bus I/O
M RS485 + cable Remote CAN bus I/O
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
(FW version 6.xx or below. See Note 11.)
B 10/100 Base TX (**)
C 10/100 Base TX + 100 Base FX (**)
D 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base FX (**)
E Redundant 10/100 Base TX (**)
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
(FW version 7.xx or above)
G 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base TX (See Note 3)
H 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base FX (See Note 3)
J PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX (See Note 4)
K PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
(See note4)
L PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX*+ Redundant 100 Base TX (See Note 4)
M PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX*+ Redundant 100 Base TX
(See Note 4)
I/O BOARD IN SLOT F
1 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs
2 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 trip/close circuit supervision circuits
4 32 Digital Inputs
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs
I/O BOARD IN SLOT G
0 None
1 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs
4 32 Digital Inputs (see Note 1)
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs (See Note 1)
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300).
HI
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
LOR Redundant LO
HIR Redundant HI

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-5

2.4 ORDER CODES CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

LANGUAGE
- English/English
C Chinese/English (See Note 2 and Note 7)
F French/English
P Russian/English (See Note 2)
S Spanish/English
T Turkish/English
COMMUNNICATION PROTOCOLS & Cybersecurity
- Modbus® RTU, TCP/IP, DNP 3.0 Level 2, IEC 60870-5-104, Basic
Cybersecurity level
3 IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus® RTU,TCP/IP, Basic Cybersecurity level
IEC 61850 (See Note 10), Modbus® RTU and TCP/IP,DNP 3.0 Level 2,
6
IEC 60870-5-104, Basic Cybersecurity level
Modbus® RTU, TCP/IP, DNP 3.0 Level 2, IEC 60870-5-104, Advanced
A
Cybersecurity level
IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus® RTU,TCP/IP, Advanced Cybersecurity
B
level
IEC 61850 (See Note 10), Modbus® RTU and TCP/IP,DNP 3.0 Level 2,
D
IEC 60870-5-104, Advanced Cybersecurity level
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
- Without Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating
H Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating
M Marine range: Lloyd’s Register (See Note 9)
ENHANCED DISPLAY
- Display with RS232 (See Note 8)
E Enhanced Display with USB

SPECIAL MODELS MOD001 (Abbreviation "+M1"): have 6A output contacts instead of 16A.

Notes:
(*) For firmware version 7.00 or above, Port E is only intended for maintenance purposes.
(**) Discontinued
(1) Order code option F4 requires option G4 or G5. Order code option F5 requires option G5.
For example: F1G5 is a valid selection and F5G1 is an invalid selection.
(2) Display options with language selection:
Graphic display: available for English, French, Spanish and Chinese languages. For Chinese and Russian only IEC symbols option is
available (N in order code).
Basic display: available for all languages
(3) Advance functionalities Level I:
G, H: IEEE1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP), 61850 Edition 2.0. Digital counters. Max numbers of starts and Cold Load Pick-up
functionalities.
(4) Advance functionalities Level II:
J, L: Parallel Redundancy Port (PRP,) IEEE1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP), 61850 Edition 2.0. Digital counters, DFT, 16 Switchgear
mapped in IEC61850, 16 nodes CILO, mapping of BlkOpn and BlkCls leafs of XSWI nodes, Max numbers of starts and Cold Load Pick-
up functionalities.
K, M: High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Parallel Redundancy Port (PRP,) IEEE1588
Precision Time Protocol (PTC), 61850 Edition 2.0. Digital counters, DFT, 16 Switchgear mapped in IEC61850, 16 nodes CILO, mapping of
BlkOpn and BlkCls leafs of XSWI nodes, Max numbers of starts and Cold Load Pick-up functionalities.
(5) For special models requested, relay order code shall be codified as a standard model (Table 2-1) following by Abbreviation + MX where X
indicates the number of special model selected.
(6) For non-last released firmware version models requested, relay order code shall be codified as standard model (Table 2-1), following by
Abbreviation +VXXXXXBYYYYY where XXXXX is the firmware version requested and YYYYY is the corresponding bootcode version.
(7) Chinese Language: This language is not supported for Rear Ethernet Communication Board options: G, H, J, K, L or M

2-6 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 ORDER CODES

(8) Display option with RS232 is not available for F650 Models with Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 options from G to M or with
Environmental Protection option M
(9) Marine Range option M in the Environmental Protection section is only available with REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
options G,H,J,K,L or M
(10) For F650 order codes with Communication Option 6, Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2, and firmware version 7.52 or above,
IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 is also available. The relay will work with IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 or Edition 2.0, depending on which ICD file has been
sent to the device. See section7.6.3.1.2: Quick Menu Toolbar on page 7–221.
(11) Models with REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATION BOARD 2 option B, C, D or E do not work with FW version 7.xx or above. If you want to
take advantage of the 650 family evolution with extended functionality (FW 7.xx or above), please order models with REAR ETHERNET
COMMUNICATION BOARD 2 option: G, H, J, K, L or M
(12) Cybersecurity functionality available in Order Code is only applicable to firmware versions 9.00 and onwards. For further information,
see chapter 8-Security.

For applications requiring a high number of inputs and outputs, F650 units can be connected to a CIO module
(Remote CAN bus I/O module) for using up to 2 additional boards.
F650 units allow monitoring and configuring these I/O boards as if they were internal boards, located on slots F and G. In
this case, slots are labeled as H and J.
The required information to completely define a CIO Module is shown on Table 2–2:.
Table 2-2: Order code for CIO module
CIO H - J - - DESCRIPTION
I/O BOARD IN SLOT H
1 16 Digital inputs + 8 outputs
2 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 trip/close circuit supervision circuits
4 32 Digital Inputs
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs
I/O BOARD IN SLOT J
0 None
1 16 Digital inputs + 8 outputs
4 32 Digital Inputs (See Note 1)
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs (See Note 1)
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
HI 110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300)
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
H Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating

(1) The digit selected for option J must be equal or higher than the digit selected for option H for models including boards 4 and 5.
CIOH1J5**: is a valid selection
CIOH5J1**: is an invalid selection

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-7

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.5 Technical specifications

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

2.5.1 Protection
Phase and Ground protection functions use currents measured through CT inputs for performing internal calculations,
while the Neutral protection functions use the current calculated from three phase currents.
The sensitive ground protection functions are usually used for applications where the neutral is completely isolated. These
functions use current measured though the sensitive ground current input. This CT has a sensitivity 10 time higher than
standard CT inputs (Connected to 1A and 5A CT) and its current withstand is lower.

PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51PH/51PL)

Current Input: .............................................................................phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current:............................................................................for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape: ..............................................................................IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):..................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Voltage Restraint:.....................................................................selectable by setting
Saturation Level: .......................................................................48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

2-8 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51G)

Current Input: ............................................................................ phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current: ........................................................................... for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape:.............................................................................. IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):................................................. 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type:.................................................................................. instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (51N)

Current Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape:.............................................................................. IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):................................................. 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type:.................................................................................. instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-9

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51SG)

Current Input: .............................................................................phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current:............................................................................for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.005 to 16.000 A in steps of 0.001 A
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16.000 A
Curve Shape: ..............................................................................IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):..................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Saturation Level: .......................................................................48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

PHASE AND GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50PH/50PL/50G)

Current Input: .............................................................................phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current:............................................................................for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Overreach: ...................................................................................< 2%
Trip Delay: ....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:.............................................................................< 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)

Current Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Overreach: ...................................................................................< 2%
Trip Delay: ....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:.............................................................................< 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

2-10 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG)

Current Input: ............................................................................ phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current: ........................................................................... for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.005 to 16.000 A in steps of 0.001 A
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... values at nominal frequency:
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16.000 A
Overreach: .................................................................................. < 2%
Trip Delay:.................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay:................................................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

ISOLATED GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50IG)

Current Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Current Pickup Level: ............................................................. 0.005 to 0.400 A in steps of 0.001 A
Voltage Pickup Level: ............................................................. 2 to 70 V in steps of 1 V
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... ±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16.000 A
Trip Delay:.................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time to Instantaneous: ......................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT (46)

Current Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ±10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape:.............................................................................. IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):................................................. 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type:.................................................................................. instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-11

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

PHASE DIRECTIONAL (67P)

Directionality: .............................................................................forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing:.....................................................................................quadrature voltage:
ABC seq: Phase A (VBC), Phase B (VCA), Phase C (VAB)
ACB seq: Phase A (VCB), Phase B (VAC), Phase C (VBA)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold: .............................................0 to 300 Vac in steps of 1 V
Current Sensitivity Threshold:.............................................50 mA
Characteristic Angle:...............................................................-90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic: .................................................................................permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................±3º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Voltage Memory Time: ...........................................................0.00 to 3.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:.............................................................................< 30 ms, typically

GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67G)

Directionality: .............................................................................forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing:.....................................................................................voltage, current, dual
Polarizing Voltage: ...................................................................VN (measured or calculated, selected by setting)
Polarizing Current: ...................................................................Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Operating Current:...................................................................Ig (measured from 4th current transformer)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold: .............................................0 to 300 Vac in steps of 1 V
Polarizing Current Threshold: .............................................0.005 A
Characteristic Angle:...............................................................-90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic: .................................................................................permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................±3º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Operate Time:.............................................................................< 30 ms, typically

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL (67N)

Directionality: .............................................................................forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing:.....................................................................................voltage, current, dual
Polarizing Voltage: ...................................................................VN (measured or calculated, selected by setting)
Polarizing Current: ...................................................................Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Operating Current:...................................................................IN
Polarizing Voltage Threshold: .............................................0 to 300 Vac in steps of 1 V
Polarizing Current Threshold: .............................................0.005 A
Characteristic Angle:...............................................................-90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic: .................................................................................permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................±3º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Operate Time:.............................................................................< 30 ms, typically

SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67SG)

Directionality: .............................................................................forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing:.....................................................................................voltage
Polarizing Voltage: ...................................................................V N (measured or calculated, selected by setting)
Operating Current:...................................................................Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold: .............................................0 to 300 Vac in steps of 1 V
Characteristic Angle:...............................................................-90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic: .................................................................................permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................±2º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Operate Time:.............................................................................< 30 ms, typically

2-12 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

THERMAL MODEL (49)

Current Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Rated Current: ........................................................................... for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... ±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Heating Constant: ................................................................... 3.0 to 600.0 minutes in steps of 0.1 minutes
Cooling Constant: .................................................................... 1.00 to 6.00 times the heating constant, in steps of 0.01
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)

Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor (without harmonics) of phase-to-phase voltages
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 2 to 30 V in steps of 1 V
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... ±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency
Trip Delay:.................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay:................................................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... ±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Logic: ............................................................................................. Any/Two/All phases logic, selectable by setting
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P)

Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor of phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages (selectable by
setting)
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 3 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 102% to 103% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... ±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency
Trip Delay:.................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Curve Shapes:............................................................................ fixed time or inverse curves
Reset Type:.................................................................................. instantaneous
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):................................................. 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... ±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Minimum Voltage Threshold: ............................................. 0 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Logic: ............................................................................................. Any/Two/All phases logic, selectable by setting
Supervised by Breaker: ......................................................... selectable by setting
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59NH/59NL)

Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor of the neutral voltage
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 3 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... ±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency
Trip Delay:.................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay:................................................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... ±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-13

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (47)

Voltage Input:.............................................................................fundamental phasor
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................3 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V
Trip Delay: ....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (59X)

Voltage Input:.............................................................................fundamental phasor of the auxiliary voltage
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................3 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency
Trip Delay: ....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27X)

Voltage Input:.............................................................................fundamental phasor of the auxiliary voltage
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................3 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Dropout Level:............................................................................102% to 103% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency
Curve Shapes: ............................................................................fixed time or inverse curves
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):..................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Dropout Level:............................................................................pickup + 0.03 Hz
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±0.05 Hz of the reading from 30 to 80 Hz
Trip Delay: ....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Minimum Voltage Threshold:..............................................10 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Time Delay Accuracy: .............................................................0 to 7 cycles
Operate Time:.............................................................................typically 10 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Dropout Level:............................................................................pickup - 0.03 Hz
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±0.05 Hz of the reading from 30.00 to 80.00 Hz
Trip Delay: ....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Minimum Voltage Threshold:..............................................10 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Time Delay Accuracy: .............................................................0 to 7 cycles
Operate Time:.............................................................................typically 10 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

2-14 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FORWARD POWER (32FP)

Current, Voltage: ...................................................................... fundamental phasor (primary values)
Number of Stages: .................................................................. 2
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.00 to 10000.00 MW in steps of 0.01 MW
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy for Primary Magnitudes:...................... ±3% of complete range
Trip Delay (Two Stages):........................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Block Time After Close:.......................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)

Current, Voltage: ...................................................................... fundamental phasor (primary values)
Number of Stages: .................................................................. 2
Pickup Level:............................................................................... -10000.00 to 10000.00 MW (primary values) in steps of 0.01 MW
Characteristic Angle (Two Stages): .................................. 0.00º to 359.99º in steps of 0.01º
Accuracy for Primary Magnitudes:.................................. ±3% of complete range
Trip Delay (Two Stages):........................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Block Time After Close:.......................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 45 ms at 50 Hz, typically

WATTMETRIC ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL (32N)

Measured Power: ..................................................................... zero sequence
Number of Elements: ............................................................. 6 (3 high level, 3 low level)
Voltage Pickup Level VN: ...................................................... 2.00 to 70.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
voltage calculated from phases if auxiliary voltage is set to Vx
voltage measured from the 4th voltage transformer if auxiliary voltage is set to VN
Level Accuracy for Voltage: ................................................ ±1% of reading from 10 to 208
Current Selection: .................................................................... IN (calculated from phases)
IG (measured from the 4th current transformer)
OC Pickup Level: ....................................................................... 0.005 to 0.400 A in steps of 0.001
Level Accuracy for Current: ................................................ ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
OC Pickup Delay: ...................................................................... 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Power Pickup Level: ................................................................ 0.01 to 4.50 W in steps of 0.01 W
Characteristic Angle (MTA): ................................................. 0º to 360º in steps of 1º
Power Pickup Delay:............................................................... 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Level Accuracy for Power: ................................................... ±2.5% of the reading at -0.8 ≤ PF ≤ -1 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1
Curve Shapes:............................................................................ Inverse Curve
Definite Time
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curves
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):................................................. 0.02 to 2.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Tripping Time Accuracy: ....................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 45 ms at 50 Hz, typically

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-15

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.5.2 Control
AUTORECLOSE (79)
Schemes: ......................................................................................three-pole tripping schemes
Number of Shots:......................................................................up to 4 reclose attempts before lockout
Dead Time:...................................................................................independent dead time setting before each shot
adjustable between 0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s.
Reclaim Time: .............................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Condition Permission:.............................................................selectable by setting
Hold Time: ....................................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Time: ..................................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting
Protection settings can be modified after each shot through PLC programming (block signals are available after each shot).

SYNCHROCHECK (25)
Dead/live Level for Line and Bus:......................................0.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01 V
Maximum Voltage Difference:............................................2.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
Maximum Angle Difference:................................................2.0º to 80.0º in steps of 0.1º
Maximum Frequency Slip:....................................................10 to 5000 mHz in steps of 10 mHz
Synchronism Time: ..................................................................0.01 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................3º
Dead Source Function: ..........................................................None
(DL-DB) Dead Line - Dead Bus
(LL-DB) Live Line-Dead Bus
(DL-LB) Dead Line – Live Bus
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

FUSE FAILURE
Algorithm based on positive sequence of voltage and current
Activation by V2/V1 ratio

BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)

Current Input: .............................................................................phasor (without harmonics)
Rated Current:............................................................................for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level for Supervision: ..............................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup Level for High Level: .................................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup Level for Low Level: ..................................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup Level for Internal Arcing:........................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

2-16 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CT SUPERVISION FAILURE (60CTS)

Inputs: ........................................................................................... Neutral Current IN
Neutral Voltage VN (from three-phase VTs)
Ground Current Ig
Sensitive Ground Current Isg
Time Delay: ................................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
3IO Level Accuracy: ................................................................ ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A (for ground)
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5.000 A (for sensitive ground
3VO Level Accuracy:............................................................... ±1% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Ground Current Accuracy:................................................... ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
Sensitive Ground Current Accuracy:............................... ±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5.000 A
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 20 ms at 60 Hz
< 25 ms at 50 Hz
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

SECOND HARMONIC INHIBIT

Operating Parameter:............................................................ current 2nd harmonic per phase or average
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.1 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1%
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy:......................................................................... 2% or 10 mA
Minimum Current:.................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Time Delay: ................................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time Delay Accuracy: ............................................................ ±3% of expected time or 1.5 cycles (whichever is greater)
Time Accuracy: ......................................................................... 3% or 1.5 cycles
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

BROKEN CONDUCTOR (I2/I1)

Pickup Level:............................................................................... 20.0-100.0% (I2/I1 ratio) in steps of 0.1%
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Trip Delay:.................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting
Operation Threshold: ............................................................. 0.000 to 1.000 A in steps of 0.001 A
Current Inhibition Level:........................................................ selectable by setting from 0.000 to 1.000 A in steps of 0.001 A

LOCKED ROTOR (48)

Current Input: ............................................................................ phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current: ........................................................................... for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Full Load Current: .................................................................... 0.10 to 10.00 kA in steps of 0.01 kA
Pickup Level:............................................................................... .1.01 to 109.00 in steps of 0.01 x FLC
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy for Primary Magnitudes:...................... ±3% complete range
Trip Delay:.................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay:................................................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ 20 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: ..................................................................... ±3% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

PULSE COUNTERS
Number of Pulse Counters Available:............................. up to 8
Multiplier Factor: ...................................................................... 0.000 to 65000.000 in steps of 0.001
Overload Factor:....................................................................... 0 to 10000000 in steps of 1
Board Origin: .............................................................................. all available input/output boards in the device. See order code (F, G, H, J)
Input Origin:................................................................................ up to 32 (depending on board selection type)

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-17

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

ANALOG COMPARATORS
Analog Input: ..............................................................................any analog value in the device
Analog Maximum Threshold Value:.................................-100000.000 to 100000.000 in steps of 0.001
Analog Minimum Threshold Value: ..................................-100000.000 to 100000.000 in steps of 0.001
Analog Delay: .............................................................................0.00 to 900.00 in steps of 0.01
Analog Hysteresis: ...................................................................0.0 to 50.0 in steps of 0.1
Analog Direction (for activation inside or outside the
deadband: .............................................................................. IN or OUT

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE

df/dt Trend:..................................................................................increasing, decreasing, bidirectional
df/dt Pickup Level:....................................................................0.10 to 10.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01 Hz/s
df/dt Level Accuracy:..............................................................80 mHz/s or 3.5% (whichever is greater)
Overvoltage Supv.....................................................................0.00 to 110.00% in steps of 0.01%
95% Settling Time for df/dt:.................................................< 24 cycles
Operate Time:.............................................................................at 2 x pickup: 12 cycles
at 3 x pickup: 8 cycles
at 5 x pickup: 6 cycles
Frequency Rate Min. ...............................................................20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Frequency Rate Max...............................................................20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Frequency Rate Delay:...........................................................0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

LOAD ENCROACHMENT
Responds to: ...............................................................................positive sequence quantities
Minimum Voltage: ....................................................................0.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
Reach (sec.Ω): ...........................................................................0.02 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Ω
Impedance Accuracy: ............................................................±3%
Angle: .............................................................................................5 to 50º in steps of 1º
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................±3%
Pickup Delay: ..............................................................................0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Time Accuracy: ..........................................................................±3.5% or ±60 ms, whichever is greater
Operate Time:.............................................................................< 60 ms at 50 Hz, typically
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

BREAKER SETTINGS
Number of Switchgear:..........................................................1 to 16 (selection of switchgear for breaker control)
Maximum KI2t: ...........................................................................0.00 to 9999.99 (kA)2s in steps of 0.01 (kA)2s
KI2t Integration Time: .............................................................0.03 to 0.25 s in steps of 0.01
Maximum Openings:...............................................................0 to 9999 in steps of 1
Maximum Openings in One Hour: ....................................1 to 60 in steps of 1
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

BREAKER MAINTENANCE
KI2t Breaker Counters for Phases A, B, C:......................0.00 to 9999.99 (kA)2s in steps of 0.01 (kA)2s
Breaker Opening Counters: .................................................0 to 9999 in steps of 1
Breaker Closing Counters:....................................................0 to 9999 in steps of 1

SWITCHGEAR
Switchgear: .................................................................................1 to 16 (configurable in Relay Configuration)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting (for each switchgear, in System Setup)

MAXIMUM NUMBER OF STARTS

Metering Algorithm:.................................................................fundamental
Tripping Time Accuracy:........................................................±250 ms or 5% (whichever is greater)
Full Load Amps: .........................................................................0.5 to 10.0 A in steps of 0.1 A
Breaker Supervision: ...............................................................selectable by setting
Min. Stop Time:...........................................................................0.0 to 900.0 s in steps of 0.1 s

2-18 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Number of Starts: .................................................................... 0 to 10 in steps of 1

Time to Restart:......................................................................... 0 to 100 minutes in steps of 1 minute
Reset Counter:........................................................................... selectable by setting
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 45 ms at 50 Hz, typically

DIGITAL COUNTERS
Function: ...................................................................................... Disabled, Enabled
Name:............................................................................................ any 12 alphanumeric characters
Preset: ........................................................................................... -2147483648, 0, +2147483647
Compare: ..................................................................................... -2147483648, 0, +2147483647

COLD LOAD PICKUP

Cold Outage Time:................................................................... 1 to 1000 minutes in steps of 1 minute
Cold Blocking Time:................................................................. 1 to 1000 s in steps of 1 s

2.5.3 Monitoring
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum Records: ................................................................. up to 20 oscillography records
Sampling Rate:.......................................................................... programmable to 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 samples per power cycle
Capacity per record:............................................................... (27592 samples)/(number of oscillos x number of samples/cycle)
Maximum Records: ................................................................. up to 20 oscillography records
Trigger Position:........................................................................ 5% to 95% of total length
Trigger:.......................................................................................... programmable via PLC
Data: .............................................................................................. 5 current channels and 4 voltage channels up to 16 digital channels programmable
through PLC
Data Storage:............................................................................. non-volatile (flash) memory without battery
Format: ......................................................................................... International Standard COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999
Automatic Overwrite:............................................................. selectable by setting (oscillography records can be concatenated)
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting

FAULT LOCATOR
Method: ........................................................................................ single-ended
Positive Sequence Module: ................................................. 0.01 to 250.00 Ohm in steps of 0.01 Ohms
Positive Sequence Angle: ..................................................... 25 to 90º in steps of 1º
Zero Sequence Module: ........................................................ 0.01 to 750.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Ω
Zero Sequence Angle:............................................................ 25 to 90º in steps of 1º
Line Length: ................................................................................ 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 miles or km (as per line length setting)
Accuracy:..................................................................................... 5% (typically)
Show Fault on HMI:................................................................. selectable by setting
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting
Maximum Records: ................................................................. up to 10 fault report records
Data: .............................................................................................. Fault date and time, pre-fault currents and voltages, fault currents and voltages, fault
type, distance to the fault (fault location), line parameters, recloser and breaker status
information.
Data Storage:............................................................................. In non-volatile (flash) memory without battery available through communications In
volatile (RAM) memory available through HMI (if selectable by setting)
Format: ......................................................................................... text in ASCII format

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-19

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

SNAPSHOT EVENTS
Capacity*:.....................................................................................1023 scrolling events
Time-tag: ......................................................................................1 ms using an internal clock of 100 μs
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................1 ms (using IRIG-B synchronization)
Triggers: ........................................................................................any element pickup, dropout, or operation
digital input/output change of state
virtual inputs and control events
Data Storage: .............................................................................non-volatile (flash) memory without battery
*Note: For firmware 7.20, up to 511 snapshot events are available. For firmware below 7.20, up to 479 snapshot events are available.

CONTROL EVENTS
Capacity:.......................................................................................128 events programmable through PLC
Time-tag: ......................................................................................1 ms plus one PLC cycle using an internal clock of 100 μs. For digital inputs,
the debounce time of these digital inputs must be added.
Timing Accuracy: ......................................................................1 ms (with IRIG-B synchronization input)
Trigger: ..........................................................................................Any digital signal programmable through the PLC
Alarm:.............................................................................................Control events can be displayed as an alarm on the alarms panel. Information is
always available through Communications for all models and in the HMI for models
with a graphical display (M in order code).
Data Storage: .............................................................................non-volatile (flash) memory without battery
Control events are also displayed in the snapshot events recording

DEMAND
Channels:......................................................................................9
Parameters:.................................................................................Ia (kA RMS), Ib (kA RMS), Ic (kA RMS), Ig (kA RMS), Isg (kA RMS), I2 (kA), P (MW), Q (MVAr)
and S (MVA)
Current and Power Method:................................................Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling Demand
Measurements:..........................................................................Each channel shows the present and maximum measured value, with date and time
for the maximum recorded value.
Samples: .......................................................................................5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
Accuracy:......................................................................................±2%
Trigger Input: ..............................................................................selectable by setting (operation mode selection for the block interval calculation
method)
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

DATA LOGGER
Number of Channels:..............................................................1 to 16
Parameters:.................................................................................any available analog actual value
Samples: .......................................................................................1 second, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
Storage Capacity:.....................................................................fixed, 32768 measurements

2-20 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.4 User-programmable
PLC LOGIC
Programming language: ...................................................... The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the IEC
61131-3 standard.
Lines of code*:........................................................................... 640 lines of code or 15360 bytes, whichever is greater (for versions < 7.00)
1000 total equations or 15360 bytes, whichever is greater (for versions >= 7.00)
(*) Note: Reserved Modbus memory space of PLC equations in text format is up to 15360 bytes. This space is shared with information
configured in EnerVista at Setpoint > Relay Configuration. According to this, the number of PLC equations can be limited by values
configured on that section.
Supported operations:........................................................... NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 8 inputs), AND (2 to 8 inputs), NOR (2 to 8 inputs),
NAND (2 to 8 inputs), Latch (Reset Dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers.
2 inputs default gates, from 3 to 8 inputs provided in library format.
Starting in version 7.20, analog operators are also available.
Libraries:....................................................................................... Logical gates fully programmable by user. Used to create user-programmable logic to
be distributed as a single object.
Inputs: ........................................................................................... any logical variable, contact or virtual input
Number of Timers:................................................................... 8 maximum in each logic scheme (provided in library format)

FLEXCURVES
Number: ....................................................................................... 4 (A through D)
Reset Points:............................................................................... 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate Point: ........................................................................... 80 (0 through 20 of pickup)
Time Delay: ................................................................................. 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 ms
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 20 x the pickup level

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Number: ....................................................................................... 15 configurable LEDs plus the Ready non-configurable LED
Programmability: ..................................................................... any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Reset Mode:................................................................................ self-reset or latched.
The first 5 LEDs (red) are latched by hardware, usually configured for trip signals.
The following 10 LEDs (yellow and green) are self-reset but can be latched through PLC
configuration.
Reset Signal:............................................................................... The LEDs can be reset by hardware, pressing the front “esc” key for more than 3
seconds or using the LED reset signal through PLC configuration.

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of Configurable Displays:................................... 1: one line diagram fully configurable. In graphical displays only
Number of Fixed Displays:................................................... 6: Metering (selectable between Primary and Secondary values), Snapshot Events (all
and new), Alarms, Inputs and Outputs screen with test functionality for inputs and
outputs. (In graphical displays only.)
Number of Selectable Displays: ........................................ 2: Logotype, Metering, or both in scrolling mode can be selected as the default screen
in text display for all models (basic and mimic). The metering screen contains current
and voltages for phases and ground in primary or secondary values.

USER-PROGRAMMABLE FRONT KEYS

Number of Configurable Keys: .......................................... 5
Operation: ................................................................................... Drive PLC operands

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-21

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.5.5 Metering
CURRENT
Accuracy (at nominal frequency):.....................................±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A (for phases and ground)
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5 A (for sensitive ground)
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
% of Load-to-trip Accuracy:................................................±0.5% of full-scale

VOLTAGE
Accuracy:......................................................................................±1% of reading from 10 to 208 V

REAL POWER (WATTS)

Accuracy:......................................................................................±2.0% of the reading at -0.8 ≤ PF ≤ -1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0

REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

Accuracy:......................................................................................±2.0% of the reading at -0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2

APPARENT POWER (VA)

Accuracy:......................................................................................±2.0% of the reading

WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy:......................................................................................±2.0% of the reading
Range:............................................................................................-2147483 to +2147483 MWh
Parameters:.................................................................................3-phase only
Update Rate:...............................................................................100 ms

WAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Accuracy:......................................................................................±2.0% of the reading
Range:............................................................................................-2147483 to +2147483 MVArh
Parameters:.................................................................................3-phase only
Update Rate:...............................................................................100 ms

FREQUENCY

Accuracy:......................................................................................+/- 0.03Hz
From 30 to 80 Hz
Note: Voltage input must be above 10 V to start measuring frequency

ANGLE
Accuracy:......................................................................................±3º

2.5.6 Inputs
AC CURRENT INPUTS
CT Ratio:........................................................................................1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1
Rated Currents:..........................................................................Appropriate for 1 or 5 A. F650 has universal range for CT (valid for 1 or 5 A to only one
terminal).
Relay Burden: .............................................................................< 8 mVA at 1 A
< 200 mVA at 5 A VA
Input Impedance: .....................................................................< 8 mOhm
Current Withstand: ..................................................................Continuous at 20 A
1 s at 500 A for phases and ground
1 s at 50 A for sensitive ground

2-22 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

AC VOLTAGE INPUTS
VT Ratio: ....................................................................................... 1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1
Rated Voltage:........................................................................... 275 Vac
Metering Range: ....................................................................... From 2 to 275 Vac
Relay Burden:............................................................................. 0.05 VA at 120 Vac (50 or 60 Hz)
Voltage Withstand: ................................................................. Continuous at 275 V to neutral
1 min/hr at 420 to neutral
VAC inputs do not need varistors, as the impulse test is applied to 100% of the transformers

CONTACT INPUTS
Input Activation Threshold: ................................................. 10 to 230 Vdc in steps of 1 V (selectable by setting)
Impedance:................................................................................. > 100 kΩ
Maximum Error:........................................................................ ±10% setting or ± 5 V
Load for Voltage Supervision Inputs: ............................. 2 mA + V/100 kΩ
Voltage Threshold for Voltage Supervision Inputs:.. < 10 V (fixed)
Debounce Time:........................................................................ 1 to 50 ms in steps of 1 ms
Recognition Time: .................................................................... 2 ms (typical)
Timing Resolution: ................................................................... 1 ms
For Activation Voltage Threshold and Debounce Time there is a single setting for all inputs in the same group (all inputs sharing the same
common).
Input Type and Delay Input Time are not grouped; there is a different setting for each input.
Input Type: .................................................................................. positive-edge/negative-edge/positive/negative
Delay Input Time: ..................................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (input signal time delay)

REMOTE INPUTS (IEC61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Number of Input Devices: .................................................... 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
Number f Remote Devices: ................................................. 16 (24 for relay version 7.00 and above)
Default States on Loss of Comms:................................... On, Off, Latest/on, Latest/off

ANALOG INPUTS
Input Impedance: .................................................................... 116Ω
Current Input (mADC):............................................................ 0 to -1; 0 to +1; -1 to +1; 0 to 5; 0 to 10; 0 to 20; 4 to 20 (programmable)
Conversion Range: .................................................................. -1 to +20 mA
Accuracy:..................................................................................... ±0.2% of full scale
Type:............................................................................................... passive

IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude Modulation:.......................................................... DC SHIFT = demodulated input (no carrier)
Input Voltage: ............................................................................ TTL
Input Burden: ............................................................................. 1.5 mA
Input Impedance: .................................................................... 3.3 kΩ
Minimum Input Voltage: ....................................................... 2.4 V
Maximum Input Voltage:...................................................... ± 24 V
Formats: ....................................................................................... B000 (*) B001, B002 and B003 (*
(*) Signal combinations recognized in accordance with IRIG Standard 200-95
Isolation:....................................................................................... 2 kV

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-23

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.5.7 Real time clock

Accuracy:......................................................................................typical ±20 ppm
Backup Energy:..........................................................................more than 1 week
Note: For relay versions before 7.00, when the relay date and time is changed using any documented methods (Modbus, IRIG-B, SNTP,
Front Panel...) the relay acknowledges and updates the time instantly but it takes nearly 3 minutes for the new time to be permanently
stored in the Real Time Clock’s NVRAM.

2.5.8 Outputs
OUTPUTS
Single Contact Carry continuous: .....................................16 A
Make and Carry for 1 s: .........................................................60 A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: ............................................................0.3 A DC max. at 125 Vdc
0.25 A DC max. at 250 Vdc
Operate Time:.............................................................................< 8 ms
Contact Material: ......................................................................silver alloy
Output Logic Type, Output Type and Pulse Output Time are selectable by setting for each output
Output Logic Type:...................................................................positive/negative
Output Type: ...............................................................................normal/pulse/latch (selectable by setting for each output)
Pulse Output Time:...................................................................0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (applicable only to signals sent as pulse type)
Separate operate and reset signals can be configured by any digital signal programmable through the PLC
Contact Outputs (F31-F33, F34-F36) for board type
2 (supervision) in slot F:.....................................................The current seal-in circuit is used for verifying the current condition in a circuit during
the time that the tripping contact remains closed. If the current in the tripping circuit is
maintained over 500 mA, the function is sealed independently of the status of the
function that caused the trip.

REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Standard Output Points:........................................................32
User Output Points:..................................................................32

2.5.9 Control power supply

LOW RANGE (LO) ALL RANGES

Nominal DC Voltage: 24 to 48 V Power Consumption: Typical =25 VA, Maximum =45 VA
Min/Max DC Voltage 19.2 / 57.6 V Display back-light auto power-off mode after 15 minutes without
Note: Low range is DC only touching any key, in order to ensure long life
and minimum consumption
Voltage Loss hold-up time:(*) 24 Vdc 30 ms
48 Vdc 100 ms
(*) These figures have been calculated for models with the following characteristic:
- IEC Symbols Graphic display
- Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX+ Redundant 100 Base FX
- F and G I/O Board:
Slot F: 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 Trip / Close circuit supervision circuits
Slot G: 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs

HIGH RANGE (HI) INTERNAL FUSE

Nominal DC Voltage: 110 to 250 V V: 250 VAC
Min/Max DC Voltage 88 / 300 V I: 2.5A
Nominal AC Voltage: 120 to 230 V Size: 5 x 20 mm
Min/Max AC Voltage: 102 / 250 V Type: Quick acting (F)
Voltage Loss Hold-up Time: 200 ms typical UL listed miniature Fuse
100 ms worst case

2-24 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.10 Communications

FRONT PORT:
Front port: COM2
Type: RS232/USB
Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 baud
Default Baud Rate: 19200 baud
Protocols: ModBus® RTU/DNP 3.0
Typical Distance: 3m
Isolation: 2 kV
ASYNCHRONOUS REAR PORTS:
None or two rear ports (depending on model): COM1, COM2 (rear COM2 multiplexed with front port)
Type (depending on model):
Model F None
Model A Redundant RS485
Model X Redundant RS485 + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model P Redundant 1mm-plastic F.O.
Model Y Redundant 1mm-plastic F.O. + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model G Redundant multimode glass F.O.
Model Z Redundant multimode glass F.O. + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model C Cable CAN port for I/O module
Model M Cable CAN port for I/O module (cable) + RS485 (ModBus RTU)
Optic Features for ST Connector Devices: Wave length: 1300nm
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 baud
Default Baud Rate: 19200 baud
Protocols: ModBus® RTU/DNP 3.0/IEC103
Typical Distance: 1200 m for cooper cable, 1000 m for glass fiber and 50 m for plastic fiber
Isolation: 2 kV
CAN PORT:
Rear Port: CAN port in models C, M, X, Y, Z for asynchronous rear ports
Type: Multimode glass F.O. port with ST connectors
Fiber Wavelength: 820 nm
Fiber Type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Maximum Recommended Length: 300 m for cooper cable and glass fiber
Isolation: 2 kV
ETHERNET PORT:
Rear port:
For models B, C, D, E: ETH_1/ ETH_2
For models G, H, J, K, L, M: ETH_E/ ETH_A/ ETH_B
Type (depending on model):
Model B: 10/100BaseTX self-negotiable
Model C: 10/100BaseTX + 100Base FX
Model D: 10/100BaseTX + redundant 100BaseFX (Physical media redundancy)
Model E: Redundant 10/100BaseTX self-negotiable ports
Model G: 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base TX
Model H: 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base FX
Model J: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
Model K: PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
Model L: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base TX
Model M: PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base TX
(*) Note: This Ethernet port (ETH_E) is intended only for maintenance purposes.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-25

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

10/100BaseTX: RJ45 connector

100BaseFX: ST connectors
Wavelength: 1300 nm
Fiber Type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Protocols: ModBus® TCP/IP
DNP over TCP/IP and UDP/IP
IEC 61850
http, ftp, tftp (allow the use of a standard Internet browser)
Typical Distance: 1000 m for glass fiber and 150 m for RJ45 cable
Response Time to ModBus Commands: 10 ms typical
Isolation: 2 kV
In Models C and D, the 10/100BaseTX port is selected by an internal switch (see 3.3.3)
Two witness LEDs for transmission and reception are included
SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (SNTP)
Clock Synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP)
PTP IEEE Std 1588 2008 (version 2)
Power Profile (PP) per IEEE Standard PC37.238TM2011
Slave-only ordinary clock
Peer delay measurement mechanism
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP) (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 4, 2012)
Ethernet ports: A and B
Networks: 10/100 MB Ethernet
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (HSR) (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 5, 2012)
Ethernet ports: A and B
Networks: 10/100 MB Ethernet
RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL (RSTP) (IEC 62439-1, IEEE 801.2D)
Ethernet ports: A and B
Networks: 10/100 MB Ethernet

2-26 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.11 Optical
Wave length: 1300 nm
Connector types: ST package style
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm

Transmitter characteristics
Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit Reference
Output Optical Power BOL -19 -14 dBm avg. Note 1
62.5/125 μm, NA = 0.275 Fiber EOL -20
Output Optical Power BOL -22.5 -14 dBm avg. Note 1
50/125 μm, NA = 0.275 Fiber EOL -23.5
Output Optical Power at -45 dBm avg. Note 2
Logic “0” State

Receiver characteristics
Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit Reference
Input Optical Power -33.9 -31 dBm avg. Note 3
Minimum at Window Edge
Input Optical Power -35.2 -31.8 dBm avg. Note 4
Minimum at Eye Center
Input Optical Power Maximum -14 dBm avg. Note 3

Notes:
1. These optical power values are measured with the following conditions:
The Beginning of Live (BOL) to the End of Life (EOL) optical power degradation is typically 1.5 dB per industry
convention for long wavelength LEDs. The actual degradation observed in Agilent’s 1300nm LED products is <1 dB, as
specified in this data sheet.
Over the specified operating voltage and temperature ranges.
With HALT Line State, (12.5 MHz square-wave), input signal.
At the end of one meter of noted optical fiber with cladding modes removed.
The average power value can be converted to a peak power value by adding 3 dB. Higher output optical power
transmitters are available on special request.
2. The transmitter provides compliance with the need for Transmit_Disable commands from the FDDI SMT layer by
providing an Output Optical Power level of <-45 dBm average in response to a logic “0” input. This specification
applies to either 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm fiber cables.
3. This specification is intended to indicate the performance of the receiver section of the transceiver when Input Optical
Power signal characteristics are present per the following definitions. The Input Optical Power dynamic range from the
minimum level (with a window time-width) to the maximum level is the range over which the receiver is guaranteed to
provide output data with a Bit Error Ratio (BER) better than or equal to 2.5e-10.
At the Beginning of Life (BOL).
Over the specified operating temperature and voltage ranges.
4. All conditions for Note 3 apply except that the measurement is made at the center of the symbol with no window
time-width.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-27

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.5.12 Environmental
Operating Temperature: .......................................................- 10°C to + 60°C
Storage Temperature:............................................................- 40°C to + 85°C
Humidity (non-condensing): ................................................95%
Altitude: .........................................................................................up to 2000 m
Class of Equipment:.................................................................I
Equipment Mobility:.................................................................fixed
Overvoltage Category:...........................................................III
Pollution Degree: ......................................................................2

2.5.13 Packaging and weight

Net Weight:..................................................................................5 kg
Packaged Weight: ....................................................................6 kg
Package Dimensions: .............................................................30 x 40 x 40 cm (D x W x H)

2.5.14 Type tests

CATEGORY STANDARD CLASS TEST

Dielectric voltage withstand IEC60255-27 2 KV / 2.3 KV
SAFETY Impulse voltage withstand IEC60255-27 5 KV
Insulation resistance IEC60255-27 500 V (test level)
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-2 Level 4
Radiated RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-3 Level 3
Electrical Fast Transient Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-4 Zone A
Surge Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-5 Zone A
Conducted RF Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-6 Level 3
Power magnetic Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-8 Level 5
EMC Power Frequency Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-16 Zone A
Damped Oscillatory Wave Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-18 2.5 KV Common Mode 1 KV Diff. Mode
Voltage Dips & Interruptions IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-11/ Levels based on IEC61000-4-11 &
IEC61000-4-29 IEC61000-4-29
Ripple on DC IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-17 15% Rated DC value
Radiated & Conducted Emissions IEC60255-26/CISPR11/ Class A
CISPR22
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock & Bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
MECHANICAL
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 2
Enclosure Protection IEC60255-27/IEC60529 IP52
Cold test (storage) IEC60068-2-1 -40˚C 16 hrs
Cold test (operational) IEC60068-2-1 -20˚C 16 hrs
Dry heat test (storage) IEC60068-2-2 85˚C 16 hrs
CLIMATIC Dry heat test (operational) IEC60068-2-2 60˚C 16 hrs
Change of Temperature IEC60068-2-14 5 cycles (3+3) -20˚C/60˚C
Damp Heat Humidity Cyclic IEC60068-2-30 6 cycles (12+12) 55˚C @ 93% R.H.
Damp Heat steady state IEC60068-2-78 40˚C @ 93% R.H.

Type test report available upon request.

F650 has been designed to comply with the highest existing requirements. More specifically, UNIPEDE recommendations
for high voltage substations are followed, even if for most applications such high classes are not required.
The relay complies with ANSI C37.90 standards, and has been designed to comply with international standards.

2-28 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

2.5.15 Approvals

APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO

CE COMPLIANCE Low voltage directive IEC60255-27
EMC Directive IEC60255-26
NORTH AMERICA UL UL508
EAC Machines and Equipment TR CU 010/2011
ISO Manufactured under a registered quality program ISO9001

EAC
The EAC Technical Regulations (TR) for Machines and Equipment apply to the Customs Union (CU) of the Russian
Federation, Belarus, and Kazakhstan

Item Description
Country of origin Spain
Date of manufacture See label on the F650 unit
Declaration of Conformity and/or Certificate of Conformity Available on request

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-29

2.6 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.6 External connections

5('81'$17
32:(5 32:(5
6833/< 6833/<
   
$ &
%
& $

 % + + + + + + + + + + *1'

&20
    56 $
$ 9$
%$&.83 %
*1'

92/7$*(,13876
5($'< %$&.835($'<

&$1 &20
$ 9$ 32:(5 32:(5
56 $
$ 9% %
7;
),%(5
$ 9% 5;

 7;

&20
$ 9& ),%(5
5;
7;
$ 9& *(0XOWLOLQ

&20
),%(5
5;

% ,$ 7;
)

&$1
),%(5
5;
% ,$
'LJLWDO%D\&RQWUROOHU *1'

&20
% ,% $
56
&855(17,13876

%
% ,%
*1'

&$1
&$%/( &$1/
% ,&
&$1+
% ,&

(7+(51(7 (7+(51(7
873 5-
% ,* 7;
);67
5;
% ,* 873 5-

7;
% ,6* );67
5;
% ,6* (7+(1* 873 5-

,5,*%
$ 9;  +
%869

 +
$ 9;

56 )5217 

23(1'(/7$97&211(&7,21 

$ &
%
& $

*5281',1*
 % 6&5(:
$ 9$

6/27*
92/7$*(,13876

$ 9$
%2$5'7<3( %2$5'7<3( %2$5'7<3( %2$5'7<3(
$ 9% *  && * && * 6+,(/' *
*  && 2 * && *
$ 9%  *
$,
*  && * && *  *
86(5&21),*85$%/(,13876

$ 9& *  && * && *  *

86(5&21),*85$%/(,13876

$,
&21),*85$%/(2873876

*  && 2 * && * *


$ 9&
*  && * && *  *
$1$/2*,13876

$,
*  && 2 * && *  *
*  && * && *  *
$,
*  &20021 2 * &20021 *  *
*  &20021 * &20021 *  *
$,
*  && 2 * && *  *
*  && * && *  *
$,
*  && 2 * && *  *
 *5281'$75(/$</2&$7,21 *  && * && *  *
$,
127&7 37/2&$7,21 *  && 2 * && *  *
*  && * && *  *
$,
*  && 2 * && *  *
237,21$/(/(0(176
*  && * && * 6+,(/' *

6/27)
%2$5'7<3( %2$5'7<3( %2$5'7<3( %2$5'7<3( %2$5'7<3( %2$5'7<3(
)  && )  &2,/ ) 2 ) && ) 6+,(/' )
9
&2,/

)  && )  D 2 ) ) && ) )


$,
)  && )  &2,/ ) 2 ) && )  )
9
86(5&21),*85$%/(,13876

)  && )  E ) ) && )  )

86(5&21),*85$%/(,13876

$,
&21),*85$%/(2873876

&21),*85$%/(2873876

)  && )  && 2 ) ) && ) )


86(5&21),*85$%/(,13876

2
)  && )  && ) ) && )  )
$1$/2*,13876

$,
)  && )  && 2 ) 2 ) && )  )
)  && )  && ) ) && )  )
$,
)  &20021 )  &20021 2 ) 2 ) &20021 )  )
)  &20021 )  &20021 ) ) &20021 )  )
$,
)  && )  && 2 ) 2 ) && )  )
)  && )  && ) ) && )  )
$,
)  && )  && 2 ) ,6(16 ) && )  )
)  && )  && ) ) && )  )
2 $,
)  && )  &2,/ 2 ) ) && )  )
9
&2,/

)  && )  D ) ,6(16 ) && )  )
$,
)  && )  &2,/ 2 ) ) && )  )
9 2
)  && )  E ) ) && ) 6+,(/' )

Figure 2-2: F650 wiring diagram (189C4216H2)

2-30 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.6 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

INPUTS / OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION FOR BOARDS F1 AND F2

SLOT F CONFIGURATION (BOARD TYPE 1)
INPUTS F1 OUTPUTS F1
F1 + CC1 52b F19
F2 + CC2 50P BLOCK O1 F20 79 BLOCK
F3 + CC3 51P BLOCK F21

USER CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS

USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS
F4 + CC4 67P BLOCK F22
F5 + CC5 50G BLOCK O2 F23 27/59 PICKUP
F6 + CC6 51G BLOCK F24
F7 + CC7 79 INITIATE F25
O3 50/67G PICKUP
F8 + CC8 79 BLOCK F26
F9 - COMMON 1/8 COMMON 1/8 F27
O4 51/67G PICKUP
F10 - COMMON 9/16 COMMON 9/16 F28
F11 + CC9 NOT USED F29
O5 50/67P PICKUP
F12 + CC10 NOT USED F30
F13 + CC11 NOT USED F31
O6 51/67P PICKUP
F14 + CC12 NOT USED F32
F15 + CC13 NOT USED F33
O7 RECLOSE
F16 + CC14 NOT USED F34
F17 + CC15 NOT USED F35
O8 TRIP
F18 + CC16 NOT USED F36

SLOT F CONFIGURATION (BOARD TYPE 2)

INPUTS F2 OUTPUTS F2
F1 + COIL 1 F19
52/a SUPERVISION O1 79 BLOCK
COIL 1
V

F2 - 52/a F20
F3 + COIL 1 F21
52/b SUPERVISION O2 27/59 PICKUP
V

F4 - 52/b USER CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS F22

F5 + CC1 52b F23
O3 50/67G PICKUP
USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

F6 + CC2 50P BLOCK F24

F7 + CC3 51P BLOCK F25
O4 51/67G PICKUP
F8 + CC4 67P BLOCK F26
F9 - COMMON 1/4 COMMON 1/4 F27
O5 50/67P PICKUP
F10 - COMMON 5/8 COMMON 5/8 F28
F11 + CC5 50G BLOCK F29
O6 51/67P PICKUP
F12 + CC6 51G BLOCK F30
F13 + CC7 79 INITIATE I SENS F31
I

F14 + CC8 79 BLOCK F32 RECLOSE

O7
F15 + COIL 2 F33
V

52/a SUPERVISION
COIL 2

F16 - 52/a I SENS F34

I

F17 + COIL 2 F35 TRIP

52/b SUPERVISION O8
V

F18 - 52/b F36

Figure 2-3: Input/output configurations for boards F1 and F2 (189C4216H1)

NOTE: For detailed information about different I/O boards types configuration, see section 5.6.1: Input/output placement
on page 5–136.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 2-31

2.6 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2-32 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

GE
Grid Solutions

F650 Digital Bay Controller

Chapter 3: Hardware

HARDWARE

3.1 Module description

High Speed serial CAN Bus

CPU Digital Optional Power

Transformer
Module Module I/O Digital Supply
I/O
VTs
and
CTs

SCREEN

Keypad
LEDs

RS
RS232 Local/
23
322
2 Remote
USB

Figure 3-1: Block diagram

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 3-1

3.1 MODULE DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

F650 units incorporate the following modules:

• Power supply, which can be simple or redundant, depending on the selected model
• Front module with alphanumerical (4 x 20) or optional graphical (16 x 40 characters) display. It includes the bus on
its rear, which communicates with the rest of modules via a high speed CAN bus.
• Transformer module with 5 current transformers and 4 voltage transformers
• CPU including a powerful DSP for measure processing as well as synchronous and asynchronous communication
accessories.
• Input/Output module included in basic unit
• Optionally, a second I/O module can be added.

3-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.2 POWER SUPPLY

3.2 Power supply

F650 can incorporate a simple or redundant power supply. The main and backup modules are identical.

Control power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the
NOTICE relay. If the voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage can occur.

The F650 relay contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to
NOTICE deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by
powering the relays up once a year.
In the case of a redundant power supply the two modules work in parallel continuously, distributing 50% of the load on
each, thus ensuring greater reliability and an instantaneous load transfer from a failed power supply to the backup,
without loss of time or module reset.
A contact relay connected to the low voltage side of the power supply monitors this voltage. The three contact terminals,
normally open, common, and normally closed, are available at the external connector terminals. The contact monitors the
power supply integrity and it is not controlled by the main microprocessor. In order to monitor whether the unit is ready to
protect (READY), an auxiliary output contacts in the unit should be programmed. This “fly-back” type power supply provides
high efficiency, stability and reliability and is available in two ranges, Hi and Low, in order to optimize efficiency and
general performance, including the capability to tolerate auxiliary voltage interruptions (dips).
Oversized components highly resistant to temperature are used. For example, all capacitors are specified to stand up to
105ºC, transformer components are specially designed to stand up to 180ºC, the MOSFET transistor has very low
resistance, supports high voltage and is refrigerated by an oversized heat sink. This allows temperatures over the 60ºC
shown in the Technical Characteristics section, and prolonged overloads such as those occurring at batteries in deep
charge mode (much higher than +15% voltage shown in the Technical Characteristics section).
High capacitance capacitors are also used, providing high tolerance to prolonged dips, 100ms, even in the most
unfavorable consumption conditions. This allows the relay to continue operating normally without undesired resets leaving
protection features offline.

In the case of a blown fuse, replacement should be conducted by authorized/trained personnel

CAUTION only. Use replacement fuses with the same characteristics.
Fuse Requirements:
V: 250 VAC
I: 2.5A
Size: 5 x 20 mm
Type: Quick acting (F)
UL listed miniature fuse
Note: Contact technical support for further guidance.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 3-3

3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

3.3 Mechanical description

The model number and electrical characteristics of the unit are indicated on the label located on the right side of the relay
case.
The metallic case of the unit is highly resistant to corrosion. It is made of stainless steel (AISI 430), coated with an epoxy
layer. The rest of the metallic pieces are covered with a high quality resistive coating that has successfully passed at least
96 hours in the salt spray chamber (S/N ASTM B-117).
The front of the relay is made of a thermoplastic, flame retardant (V0, UL94), highly resistive material, which guarantees the
unit’s immunity to all kinds of EMI/RFI/ESD interferences. There is also an IP52 (IEC 529) protection rating against dust and
water through the front and with the relay mounted in the panel.

3.3.1 Mounting
The unit is designed for semi-flush mounting. The relay is secured to the panel with the 4 M6 screws provided with the unit.
The front keypad, display, and communications port are easily access on the front of the unit. The wiring is at the rear of
the unit. Drilling dimensions are shown on Figure 3-3: Cutout and drilling dimensions

Figure 3-2: Panel mount

The relay width allows the mounting of two units on a standard 19’’ panel, 8 units high.

3-4 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

   

   

 

 
“ “

     

[‘ 
 

 

Figure 3-3: Cutout and drilling dimensions

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 3-5

3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

Figure 3-4: 19” rack dimensions 8U high for two relays

3-6 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

3.3.2 Rear description

Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed
WARNING from the unit.
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static wrap) must be used when coming in
contact with products while the relay is energized.
The relay is wired through the terminal blocks located at the rear of the unit.
The magnetic module, which receives the CT secondary currents and the metering voltages, incorporates a very robust
terminal board (columns A and B) The maximum tightening torque for the screws on terminal boards A and B is 1.2 Nm.
Current inputs provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits. The maximum recommended cable section for this
terminal board, with the appropriate terminal, is 6 mm2 (AWG 10).
The use of twisted pair wire and/or shielded is recommended for the CT secondary current Isg.
The rest of the terminal blocks, including the digital I/O and auxiliary power supply, incorporate high quality connectors
with the capacity to withstand a rated current of 17 A at 300 V. These terminal blocks changed from old ring terminal to
the pin terminal in the new hardware, admit a cable section of up to 2.54 mm2 (AWG 12).
The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus, using the shortest practical path. A tinned copper, braided,
shielding and bonding cable should be used. As a minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used.
The communication boards have different types of connector depending on the selected media: RS485, glass or plastic
fiber optic.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 3-7

3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

Figure 3-5: Connector locations for 1/2 rack model

Figure 3-6: Connector locations for form factor 19" model

3-8 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION

TYPE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTOR

RS485 / CAN cable Plug-in, 3 poles.
IRIG B Plug-in, 2 poles.

Plastic fiber optic Versatile Link

Ethernet 10/100 UTP (10/100BaseTX) RJ45, Class 5.

Glass fiber optic (100BaseFX) ST

Ethernet 100 FX (100BaseFX) ST
CAN Fiber ST

Figure 3-7: Communications media selector guide

Communication boards are installed at the rear part of the unit, the upper port being reserved for the asynchronous
communications board and CAN, and the lower port for the Ethernet board in any of its configurations.

Figure 3-8: Detail of insertion/extraction of communication modules

Note: For version 7.00 and above, only the serial card can be removed

The transformer module housing the VTs and CTs is already connected to a female connector
WARNING screwed to the case that incorporates shorting bars in the current inputs, so that it can be
extracted without the need to short-circuit the currents externally. It is very important, for
safety reasons, not to change or switch the terminals for CTs and VTs.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 3-9

3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid electrostatic discharges
that may cause damage to the electronic components

Special care is required when disconnecting CT wire leads from the terminal block.
WARNING A high voltage potential can occur if a wire is disconnected while a CT is energized.
CT isolation or de-energization is required prior to CT terminal wire removal.

3-10 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.4 WIRING

3.4 Wiring
3.4.1 External connections
F650 units can have different options for the F module:
Option 1: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 2: Board with 8 digital inputs, 4 circuit supervision inputs, 6 conventional outputs, and two current sensing
outputs
Option 4: Board with 32 digital inputs.
Option 5: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 analog inputs.
For slot G there are five different options:
Option 0: No board
Option 1: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 2: Board with 8 digital inputs, 4 circuit supervision inputs, 6 conventional outputs, and two current sensing
outputs
Option 4: Board with 32 digital inputs.
Option 5: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 analog inputs.

The number selected for slot G must be equal or higher than the number selected for option F for models including boards
4 and 5.

3.4.2 Digital inputs with trip circuit supervision

The Option 2 I/O board includes two groups of 4 inputs with one common, in terminals F9 to F10. It also includes 6 auxiliary
outputs, in terminals F19 to F30 with normally open contacts and two current sensing (latching) outputs (F31-F33 and F34-
F36).
Besides, there are 2 groups of inputs for trip circuit supervision. The first group includes two isolated digital inputs,
terminals F1-F2 and F3-F4. The second group, symmetrical and identical to the first, is formed by isolated voltage inputs
F15-F16 and F17-F18.
Using voltage detectors and current sensing, it is possible to implement several trip or close circuit supervision schemes, as
well as protection of the unit output contact.

In order to implement these schemes, it is not necessary to perform any setting in the unit.
NOTICE Internal functions are always operative. A detailed description of trip circuit supervision is
included in chapter 5 in this manual.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 3-11

3.4 WIRING CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

3.4.3 Cable/fiber Ethernet board

The Ethernet board for versions prior to 7.00 is an independent module located in the bottom at the rear part of the relay.

In models C and D (options for versions prior to 7.00), the 10/100BaseTx port is selected by an internal switch. This switch
must be configured as shown in the figure 3-8 in order to select between fiber or cable.

Figure 3-9: Fiber/cable selection

3-12 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.5 TRANSCEIVER OPTICAL POWER BUDGET VS. LINK LENGTH

3.5 Transceiver optical power budget vs. link length

Optical Power Budget (OPB) is the available optical power for a fiber optic link to accommodate fiber cable losses plus
losses due to in-line connectors, splices, and optical switches. OPB also provides a margin for link aging and unplanned
losses due to cable plant reconfiguration and repair.

OPB (dB) Fiber optic Cable length

(km)
62.5/125 μm 50/125 μm
11.4 8 0
10.9 7.4 0.3
10.5 7.1 0.5
9.6 6.2 1.0
8.5 5.3 1.5
7.3 4.3 2.0
6 3.3 2.5

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 3-13

3.5 TRANSCEIVER OPTICAL POWER BUDGET VS. LINK LENGTH CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE

3-14 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

GE
Grid Solutions

F650 Digital Bay Controller

Chapter 4: Interfaces, Settings & Actual Values

INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1 EnerVista 650 Setup software

4.1.1 Introduction
The EnerVista 650 Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two direct interfaces with a 650
device. The alternate interface is implemented via the device faceplate keypad and display (see the Human Machine
Interface (HMI) section in this chapter).
The EnerVista 650 Setup software interface provides access to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the
operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while
disconnected (offline) or connected (online) with a 650 device. In offline mode, settings files can be created for eventual
download to the device. In online mode, real-time communication with the device is supported.
The EnerVista 650 Setup software, provided with every F650 relay, can be run from a computer supporting Microsoft
Windows XP (SP 2 or 3), Windows 7 or Windows 8. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista 650 Setup
software interface features. The EnerVista 650 Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista
650 Setup software interface.
The EnerVista 650 Setup software package uses ModBus protocol, and is designed to communicate with a single relay at a
time. GE offers different communication software packages, such as GE-POWER, which can be used to communicate
simultaneously with several relays.
EnerVista 650 Setup software provides an easy way to configure, monitor and manage all F650 features.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-1

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.1.1 Using settings files

The EnerVista 650 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
1. In offline mode (relay disconnected), create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
2. In online mode (relay connected), modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to
the relay.
3. Combining online and offline modes, create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is
connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
• Product Setup
• System Setup
• Protection Elements
• Control Elements
• Inputs/Outputs
• Quick Settings
• Relay Configuration
• Logic Configuration

4.1.1.2 Viewing actual values

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measurements while connected to a relay.

4.1.1.3 Viewing triggered events

In online mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following:
• Event Recorder: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 479 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest. For firmware version 7.20 or higher, 511 events are available.
• Oscillography: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power
system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.

4.1.1.4 Firmware upgrades

The firmware of a F650 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista 650 Setup software. Instructions are
provided in Chapter 9: Bootcode and firmware upgrade.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values,
minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware.
The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.

4.1.1.5 One line diagrams

You can configure a one line diagram (bay mimic) to be used in relays with a graphical display.

4-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.2 Main screen

The EnerVista 650 Setup software main window includes the following components:
• Title bar
• Main menu bar
• Main icon bar
• Working area
• Status bar

Title

Working Area

Figure 4-1: EnerVista 650 Setup main screen

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-3

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.3 Connect to the relay

To start communicating with the relay go to Communication > Computer in the main EnerVista 650 Setup menu.

Safety instructions must be followed before connecting the computer to the relay. Safety instructions
NOTICE are detailed in section 1.1.3 Safety instructions. Connect the relay ground terminal and the
communicating computer to a good grounding. Otherwise, communication may not be viable, or
even, in worst cases, the relay and/or the computer can result damaged by overvoltages.
When working online, ensure that all relay communication parameters, such as baud rate, slave ModBus address, etc.,
match the computer settings before connected to the relay.

Figure 4-2: Communication parameters menu

The Communication > Computer screen is divided in several subsections:
• Computer settings: Main communication parameters for serial communication and control type selection.
• Modbus/TCP Setup (if ModBus /TCP is selected as control type): Communication parameters for ModBus TCP
communication.
• Communication control: Device communication status (communicating or not communicating).
• Communication optimization: allows optimizing the communication time outs and failure establishing.

4-4 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.3.1 Computer Settings:

This section shows the communication parameters needed to establish communication with the unit, such as slave
address, communication port, baud rate, parity, control type and startup mode.
Baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits and ModBus slave address for Com2 (RS232 front port and second serial port in the
rear communication board) are displayed in the default text on the relay main screen.
ModBus Slave Address: ModBus address used for serial and Ethernet communication; default 254.
Communication ports: Ports used in the computer for serial communication.
Baud Rate: Baud rate for serial communication (from 1200 to 115200 baud in EnerVista 650 Setup, from 300 to 115200
baud in relay).
Parity: Parity for serial communication. None, odd or even can be selected.
Control Type: The available control modes are:
• No Control Type, this option selects the serial communication mode, for use with serial communication ports (front
port, RS485, or plastic or glass fiber optic).
• MODBUS/TCP, this option selects ModBus TCP/IP communication mode, for communication through the Ethernet port.
In this case, the top right window shows the typical parameters to be programmed; IP address, port address and unit
identifier in the MODBUS TCP SETUP section.
• MODEM, this option displays the parameter to set in case of using a modem for the communication, such as Phone
number, Time out (sec.), init. command, type of dialing (tones or pulses).

4.1.3.2 Communication Control:

Located at the bottom of the screen, this section shows the status of communication with the relay. When the relay is not
communicating, the message "650 Setup is not talking to an 650" is shown and the ON button is enabled. Click ON to start
the EnerVista 650 Setup software communicating with the relay.
When the relay is communicating, the message "650 Setup is now talking to an 650" is shown and OFF is enabled. Click OFF
to disconnect communications between the relay and PC.

4.1.3.3 Communication Optimization:

Adjusting the parameters in the Communication optimization section can improve communication, although using the
default values is recommended in most cases. These parameters are the maximum time to wait for a response in the relay
(in ms) and the maximum number of connection attempts to perform before assuming communications failure.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-5

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.4 File management menu

File management with EnerVista 650 Setup software differs for firmware below version 7.70. and for firmware version 7.70
and above.

4.1.4.1 File Management menu for firmware below v7.70

4.1.4.1.1 Offline mode (firmware below v7.70)

Run EnerVista 650 Setup

Open a *.650 file

(“File>Open” menu)

Modify Settings and relay

configuration

YES
Is it necessary to
program
additional logic?

Launch the Logic Configuration tool in EnerVista

650 Setup (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)

Create new or modify the existing logic:

(“File>Open Project”)
NO NO

Compile and save logic file (*.pep) and drawing

design (*.aut) in Logic Configuration tool

Exit PLC Graphic Editor and save the *.650 file

from the main application menu

Is the relay
completely
configured?

YES

Save *.650 settings & configuration file

Store in the computer the Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) as
well as the *.650 for further logic changes.

Figure 4-3: Offline mode file management (firmware below v7.70)1

1. “Relay and logic configuration” and “Protection and Control Settings” must be uploaded to the F650 relay or the device
to operate properly

4-6 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Table 4-1: Types of files generated by EnerVista 650 Setup software, offline:
Logic Configuration Files (*.pep, *aut, *.lib)
Settings & Configuration File *.650
*.pep *.aut *.lib
Description Settings and Configuration Section Header for Logic Graphical edition User programmable
project container. Logic logic objects
equations (Virtual
Outputs) in FDB
format.
Created by EnerVista 650 Setup Logic configuration Logic configuration Logic configuration
graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC
Editor) Editor) Editor)
Contents Relay configuration file containing all elements PLC project file PLC Project file Library file to be
Settings, input/output and LEDs configuration, graphic containing the containing all the included as an
display configuration, etc. necessary drawings used by object in a PLC
Equations corresponding to the logic created and information the logic, required project. Logic
compiled in the PLC Editor relative to the relay by 650 relay based packages that can
model, logic on IEC 61131-3 be stored into
libraries included in standard. Functional libraries and be
the project (*.lib), block diagram (FDB). distributed in
graphic file name different PLC
(*.aut), etc. projects.
How to save EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor: PLC Editor: PLC Editor:
File > Save * File > Save Project File > Save Project File > Save Library
How to open EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor: PLC Editor: PLC Editor:
File>Open * File > Open Project File > Open Project File > Library > New
Library
How to Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer) Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer)
transfer to Open the created file (File > Open *) Launch Logic equations Editor (Setpoint > Logic
relay Send to relay from the menu: File > Send info to relay Configuration)
Note that texts used in the configuration of inputs, Open the created PLC project (File > Open Project)
outputs, etc. are not sent to the relay. The only texts Compile the project (Run > Compile)
sent to relay are operations, events, and LEDs. Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay (Run
> Send Equations to Relay). Texts of virtual outputs are not
stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to be
edited.

When using element libraries (both pre-existing in File Library > Open Library or created by the user in File Library > New
Library), the program creates and manages the corresponding files (*.lib) in a folder named FDB (Functional Block
Diagram). These files are used for PLC project compilation. The element library files must be stored with the other logic
configuration files that build the PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
Besides sending configuration information to the relay (Settings & configuration in *.650 format), storing the complete set
of *.650, *.pep, *.aut and *.lib files inside the relay is recommended (Communication > Upload info files to relay). This
ensures that logic configuration files are available in future for logic modifications. Even if these files are not used by the
relay, they are required to connect to the relay and analyze its configuration. The EnerVista 650 Setup software program
manages the logic configuration files globally, so that when the *.pep file is uploaded to the relay, the associated *.aut and
*.lib files are also stored.

File storage inside the relay Communication > Upload info files to relay through Ethernet
(RECOMMENDED)
Retrieval of files stored in the relay Communication > Download info files from relay through Ethernet
(RECOMMENDED)

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-7

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.4.1.2 Online mode (firmware below v7.70)

Run EnerVista 650 Setup

Connect to the relay

(“Communication>Computer>ON”)
NO
Modify and send to the
relay protection Settings
and relay configuration

YES
Is it necessary to
program
additional logic?

Launch the Logic Configuration tool in EnerVista

650 Setup (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)

Create new or modify the existing logic

(“File>Open Project”)

NO Compile (“Run>Compile”)
and save logic file (*.pep) and drawing design
(*.aut) in Logic Configuration tool (“File>Save
Project”)

Send logic to relay (“Run>Send Equations to

Relay”) and Exit PLC Graphic Editor

Is the relay
completely
configured?

YES

Save all settings & configuration (“File>Get info from relay”)

Store in the relay the Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) as well as the
*.650 for further logic changes. (“Communication>Upload info files to relay”)

Figure 4-4: Online mode file management (firmware below v7.70)

4-8 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Table 4-2: Types of files generated by EnerVista 650 Setup software, online
Logic Configuration Files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib)
Settings & Configuration File *.650
*.pep *.aut *.lib
Description Settings and Configuration Section Header for Logic Graphical edition User programmable
project container. Logic logic objects
equations (Virtual
Outputs) in FDB
format.
Created by EnerVista 650 Setup Logic configuration Logic configurationLogic configuration
graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLCgraphic editor (PLC
Editor) Editor) Editor)
Contents Relay configuration file containing all elements, PLC project file PLC Project file Library file to be
settings, input/output and LEDs configuration, graphic containing the containing all the included as an object
display configuration, etc. necessary drawings used by in a PLC project.
Equations corresponding to the logic created and information the logic, requiredLogic packages that
compiled in the PLC Editor relative to the relay by 650 relay based can be stored into
model, logic on IEC 61131-3 libraries and be
libraries included in standard. distributed in
the project (*.lib), Functional block different PLC
graphic file name diagram (FDB). projects.
(*.aut), etc.
How to Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer) Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer)
transfer to Send settings and configuration from file Launch 650 Logic equations editor (Setpoint > Logic
relay Configuration)
Open the created PLC project (File > Open Project)
Compile the project (Run > Compile)
Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay (Run
> Send Equations to Relay). Texts of virtual outputs are not
stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to be
edited.

Modify settings and configuration directly in the relay:

How to save EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor:

File > Get info from relay. User definable texts retrieved File > Save Project File > Save Library
are operations, events, and LEDs.
The relay does not The relay does not The relay does not
provide this provide this provide this
information unless information unless information unless
the *.pep file is the *.pep file is the *.pep file is
stored in the relay stored in the relay. stored in the relay.
To store the logic configuration files in the relay use the
Communication > Upload info files to relay option
How to store Communication > Upload info files to relay through Communication > Upload info files to relay through Ethernet
in the relay Ethernet
How to Communication > Download info files from relay Communication > Download info files from relay through
retrieve from through Ethernet Ethernet
the relay

REMINDER:

Logic programming support files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) CANNOT be retrieved directly from the relay.

It is necessary to do one of the following to store support files:

* Store in the PC
* Upload to the relay (Communication > Upload info files to relay), after which they can be retrieved from the relay

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-9

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.4.2 File Management menu for firmware v7.70 and above

Firmware versions 7.70 and above work with EnerVista 650 Setup software version 8.10 and above (see corresponding
release notes).
EnerVista 650 Setup software 8.10 and above uses a new *.650 file format, combining previous settings and configuration
files (*.650) along with Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib) into a single *.650 file.

4.1.4.2.1 Offline mode (firmware v7.70 and above)

This mode will allow to create, open and/or modify only one file (*.650) instead of multiple files that are managed for
firmware versions below 7.70 (setting and configuration file (*.650) and Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib)).
Existing *.650 files for firmware below 7.70 must be converted to files supported by firmware version 7.70 or above using
Enervista 650 Setup version 8.10 or above. During the update process, a PLC project file (*.aut,*.pep,*.lib) must be selected.

4-10 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Run Enervista 650 Setup

(version 8.10 or above)
In Offline mode

Convert a *.650 file from

Firmware version below 7.70 Open a *.650 file from
to Firmware version 7.70 or Firmware version 7.70 or
above. (File > Config File above.
(*.650) Converter) (File > Open)

Select the original *.650 file

to convert, and choose a Modify settings and relay
model and firmware version configuration
for the new file.

Select a storage path for the

new file.
Is additional logic
required? YES

Does original *.650 file

include a logic section?
Launch the Logic
Configuration tool
(Setpoint > Logic
Configuration)
YES

650 PLC editor launches.

Does the open *.650 file

Select PLC project (*.pep,
contain a previous logic
*.qut, *.lib) to add to new
configuration? YES
*.650 file.

NO

NO

Does selected PLC project NO The PLC project

Warning pop-up message is Select, create, or import a PLC (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib)
NO match logic configuration
shown. project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) corresponding to the
compiled in original *.650 file?
(File > Open, File > New, logic configuration in
or File > Import) the *.650 file
automatically opens
NO
Overwrite the logic
configuration in the original
*650 file with the selected
Modify logic, Compile, and
PLC project?
Save changes.
(WARNING: Modifications
that are compiled but not
saved will be lost!)
NO YES
YES
Select a new PLC project
(*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) using File
> Open Project or create a
new PLC project using File >
New Project
Is the relay
completely
Selected PLC project is configured?
Compile the PLC project
(Run > Compile) compiled and inserted into
new *.650 file.
YES

Save the PLC project New converted *.650 file is Save the *650
(File > Save Project) created and stored in the configuration file.
selected path. (File > Save)

Figure 4-5: Offline mode file management (firmware v7.70 and above))

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-11

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.4.2.2 Online mode (firmware v7.70 and above)

This mode allows the modification of Logic Configuration that is running in the relay without having to store a backup of
the PLC project (*.pep,*.aut,*.lib) on the local computer or by running Communication > Upload info files to relay as was
done previously.
NOTE: Storing a local PC back-up of the following 650 relay configuration files before changing settings or logic is highly
recommended:
• *.650 configuration file
• Logic programming support files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) inserted into *.650 (PLC Editor> File> Export)

Do not try to communicate with the relay during the start-up process. Doing so may cause loss
WARNING of the configuration file (*.650), leading to unexpected behavior.
Communication can be established safely once relay has fully started-up. The relay has completed
its start-up process when Menus are accessible from the HMI.

4-12 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

 CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Run Enervista 650 Setup

(version 8.10 or above)

Connect to a relay running

First time connecting to the
Firmware v7.70 or above Does the relay contain any
relay since upgrading from YES YES
(Communication > logic configuration?
Firmware below v7.70?
Computer > On)
650 PLC editor launches.

NO
Select PLC project (*.pep, *.qut,
NO *.lib) that matches equations
NO configured in the relay.
Modify settings and relay
configuration, and send to
the relay.
Does selected PLC
project match logic configuration
The PLC project is compiled YES compiled and running in the
and sent to the relay. The relay?
Is the relay PLC editor closes.
Is additional logic
completely NO
required?
configured? NO

Warning pop-up message

YES YES inform of mismatch.
YES

Save the *650 Launch the Logic

configuration file. Configuration tool
(File > Save) (Setpoint > Logic
Configuration) Overwrite the logic
configuration in the original
*650 file with the selected
The logic configuration
PLC project?
(PLC project
*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) available
in the relay automatically
opens NO
Select a new PLC project (*.pep, *.aut,
Modify existing logic, create a *.lib) using File > Open Project,
PLC project (File > New), or create a new PLC project using File >
import a PLC project from a New Project, or import a PLC project
*.650 file (File > Import) from a *.650 file using File > Import.
YES

Compile the changed PLC

project. (Run > Compile)

NO
Go to Run > Save
YES Configuration File.
Do you want to send
equations to the relay?
The PLC project is sent to the
relay and the new equations
start to run.
NO

Do you want to save the

Close the project.
project in the *.650
(File > Close Project)
configuration file?

Figure 4-6: Online mode file management (firmware v7.70 and above)

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-13

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.5 EnerVista 650 Setup menu

The EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure is shown in Table 4-3: EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure.
Unless specified, options are available in both online and offline mode.
(*) indicates options enabled only in online mode. (**) indicates options enabled only in offline mode.

The View > Language submenu allows the user to change the default language for the EnerVista
NOTICE 650 Setup program. This feature is only enabled when the relay is not communicating and no file has
been opened.
Table 4-3: EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure
IEC 61850
File Setpoint Actual Operations(*) Communication Security View Help
CONFIGURATOR
New (**) Product Setup Front Fixed Computer Login user Traces Instruction
Panel commands Manual
Open (**) System Setup Status Modem (*) Change ModBus GE Multilin
Password Memory on the web
Map
Save (**) Protection Metering Troubleshooti User Languages About
Elements ng (*) Managemen (**) EnerVista
t 650 Setup
Save As (**) Control Inputs/ Calibration (*)
Elements Outputs
Close (**) Inputs/Outputs Records Upgrade Relay
Quick Settings (*) (*)
Config File Relay
(* 650) Converter Configuration
Compare to
settings file
Properties (**) Logic Upgrade 650
Configuration Web Server
Procome Update
Configuration Magnetic
Module
IEC103
Configuration
Get info from Clock (*) Upload info
relay (*) files to relay
Send info to Download info
relay (*) files from relay
Print Setup (**)
Print Preview (**)
Print (**)
Print to file
PLC Checksum
Calculation
Settings
Checksum
Calculation
Order Code
Exit

4-14 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.6 File menu

File
New (**) Create a new settings and configuration file, with the default relay
settings and no configuration
Open (**) Open a settings and configuration file for offline working.
Save (**) Save *.650 settings and configuration file
Save As (**) Save as *.650 settings and configuration file.
Close (**) Close the opened *.650 file in EnerVista 650 Setup.
Config File (*.650) Converter Tool to convert the *.650 files from one version to another
Compare to settings file Compare online unit or opened settings file to another settings file
Properties (**) File properties for *.650.
Get info from relay (*) Retrieve the *.650 settings and relay configuration compiled equations
from the relay.
Send info to relay (*) Send and write the *.650 settings and configuration to the relay.
Print Setup (**) To configure printer settings.
Print Preview (**) Preview of settings and configuration file printing format.
Print (**) Launch the *.650 file to be printed.
Print to file (*.xls) (**) *.650 printed to file in excel format.
PLC Checksum Calculation Calculate the CRC of PLC equations of the .650 file (When a .650 is
uploaded to the relay, the calculate PLC CRC and the actual value of the
PLC CRC read from the relay must match).
Settings Checksum Calculate the CRC of settings of the .650 file (When a .650 is uploaded to
Calculation the relay, the calculate Setting CRC and the actual value of the Setting
CRC read from the relay must match).
Order code(*) Option available for F650 with firmware version 7.00 or above. This
allows a model to have special functionality (see model selection) with
password requirements. For detailed information go to section "9.6.3.3
ORDER CODE UPGRADE PROCESS" in chapter 9.
Exit Quit the application closing all the open windows.

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-15

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.6.1 New
Use the File > New menu option to create a new default settings file while working offline.
To access this menu, there must be no communication between the Enervista 650 Setup program and the relay (offline
mode).
1. Select File > New.
EnerVista 650 Setup opens a pop-up window with a list of all files available for different models/firmware versions.

– Relay Selection: Select a 650 family relay (F650, R650, C650, W650 or G650).
– Redundancy Selection (firmware v7.00 and above only): Select to include files for F650/C650 relays with Rear
Ethernet Communications 2 Board options J, K, L and M.
– Models and Firmware Selection: Click to select one of the different models and firmware versions available.
2. Once you have selected a file, click OK and wait until the file has finished loading.

4-16 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

3. A message indicates when the new *650 file has been created. Click OK to access the new file in offline mode.

4.1.6.2 Open
Use the File > Open menu option to open an existing settings file while working offline.
To access this menu, there must be no communication between the Enervista 650 Setup program and the relay (offline
mode).

Open a *.650 configuration file for firmware versions below 7.70:

• Navigate to File > Open and select a file to open.

Figure 4-7: Open file menu

Open a *.650 configuration file for firmware versions 7.70 and above:
Enervista 650 Setup version 8.10 or above is required.
1. Navigate to File > Open and select a file to open.
– If the file is a firmware v7.70 or higher file, or has already been converted, proceed to edit the settings and
configuration.
– If the file has logic configuration that has not yet been updated for firmware v 7.70 and higher, continue to follow
these steps.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-17

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

2. The following message is shown:

Click OK to continue with the update process.

3. Select a name and path for the new, updated *650 file being created.

A message explains that the *.650 file needs a PLC project

4-18 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4. Select PLC files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) as prompted.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-19

 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Depending on the *.650 file and selected PLC project files, one of the following messages may be displayed:

Message Meaning

Warning: Opening a file with firmware version x.xx while editing a file The version of the *.650 configuration file and version of the PLC
with firmware version y.yy project (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib) do not match.
Logic might be modified. Continue anyway?
Some PLC project variables may not be supported by the *.650
configuration file.

Compiled equations are different from the ones stored. Do you want Logic equations compiled in the *.650 configuration file do not match
to overwrite the stored equations? equations in the selected PLC project (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib).

Select Yes, and logic configuration from the selected PLC project
(*.pep, *.aut,*.lib) will be compiled and saved into *.650 configuration
file.

Select No, and the original logic will remain in the *.650 configuration
file.

File conversion failure. You must select an existing or a new PLC This message indicates that the conversion process is unsuccessful
project to continue with file conversion. because a PLC project has not been selected.

A PLC project (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib) must be selected for insertion into the
*.650 configuration file, and the conversion process restarts.

5. Upon successful file conversion, the newly converted *.650 file is saved.

4.1.6.3 Save/Save as
The Save as and Close file options are used to save the *.650 file into the computer and to close the current file. To work in
offline mode for settings and configuration editing, a new *.650 file can be opened without closing the previous file.
To access this menu, there must be no communication between the Enervista 650 Setup program and the relay (offline
mode).

4-20 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

During settings and configuration edits, saving your file regularly is recommended. Unsaved changes will be lost when the
file is closed.

Figure 4-8: Save/Save as file menu

4.1.6.4 Close
In addition to closing the working file, the File > Close option is used to clear all data in the EnerVista 650 Setup program,
enabling the Language, Upgrade firmware version, and Upgrade Operating system menu options.
Use the File > Close menu option to close a settings file while working offline.
To access this menu, there must be no communication between the Enervista 650 Setup program and the relay (offline
mode).
If File > Close is selected during *.650 configuration process, without first saving the file (File > Save), the following warning
message is shown:

Click OK to open the File > Save/Save as window, or Cancel to close without saving.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-21

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.6.5 Configuration file converter

The configuration file converter tool provides automatic conversion of configuration files from and older firmware version
to a newer version. In order to convert a configuration file, follow these steps:
1. Working in offline mode, go to File > Config File (*.650) Converter
2. Select the file to be converted.
3. After source file selection is complete, select conversion settings. Make the following selections:
Source Model: Indicates source F650 model and original version of selected file.
Destination model: Drop-down list of available F650 models and firmware versions. Select a
destination model and firmware version. In the bottom part of this section, a
brief description of all models affected is displayed in green after selecting one
model in the list.
Source file path Indicates the path where source model file is located.

Source Model

Destination Model

Source file path

Figure 4-9: Config file (*650) converter menu

It is possible to change the model type (FXGX) using the conversion tool. It must be taken into account that part of the logic
can be readjusted to fit the new input and output board selection. Notice also that the external wiring of input and output
boards is different for type 1, 2, 4 and 5.

File conversion to firmware version 7.70 or above

The *.650 configuration files for firmware v7.70 and above include the logic configuration and don’t require separate PLC
project files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib), some extra actions are required when converting configuration files from below firmware
v7.70 to firmware v 7.70 or above.
After selecting the *.650 source file and conversion settings:
• If the source (*.650) configuration file does not contain Logic configuration, file conversion is completed automatically.

4-22 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

• If the source (*.650) configuration file contains Logic configuration, a PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) must be selected
for insertion into the converted (*.650) configuration file.:

The selected PLC project file is checked against the (*.650) configuration file to ensure they match. If the files do not match,
the following message pops-up:

Select Yes, and the equations available on selected PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) will be compiled and stored into (*.650)
configuration file. New equations will overwrite the equations existing in (*.650) configuration file
Select No, and the following message will display to indicate that file conversion process has failed.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-23

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

To convert the *,650 file, a new PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) must be selected for insertion into the converted (*.650)
configuration file.
Note: If the PLC editor is closed before selecting, compiling and storing a PLC project, the file conversion process will not be
successful.

File conversion to firmware 7.50 or above (including firmware 7.70 or above)

The file conversion tool has been modified to include the increased number of setting groups available in firmware version
7.50 and above. In firmware version 7.50, the maximum number of setting groups (SG) available increased from 3 to 6.
Some considerations must be taken into account previous to convert (*.650) files from firmware version below 7.50 to
firmware version 7.50 or above. In these cases, the tool internally checks if setting groups functionality is enabled or
disable at Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting group in the source file and depend on its value, different conversions
are performed in elements affected by setting groups.
For example, if the Phase TOC High element is configured in the source *.650 file as described below:
Phase TOC High Phase TOC High 1 (G1) Phase TOC High 2 Phase TOC High 3(G3)
(G2)
Function ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED
Input PHASOR(DFT) PHASOR(DFT) PHASOR(DFT)
Pickup Level 0.10 1.50 2.00
Curve Definite time Definite time Definite time
TD Multiplier 0.02 0.05 0.1
Reset INSTANTANEOUS INSTANTANEOUS INSTANTANEOUS
Voltage Restraint DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED
Snapshot Events ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED

1. Note that fields in blue contain default values

CASE 1: If the setting groups option is disabled (Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting group) in the source file, conversion
is performed in the destination file as follows:
• Settings of different elements (Phase TOC High 1, 2 and 3) that belong to Setting group 1(SG1) in the source file are
copied into elements that belong to Setting Group 1 in the destination file.
• Elements in the other setting groups are configured with default values in the configuration file.
SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6
Phase TOC High G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3
Function ENABLED DISABLED
Input PHASOR(DFT)
Pickup Level 0.10 1.50 2.00 1.00
Curve Definite time IEEE Ext Inv
TD Multiplier 0.02 0.05 0.10 1.00
Reset INSTANTANEOUS
Voltage DISABLED
Restraint
Snapshot Events ENABLED

CASE 2: If the setting groups option is enabled (Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting group) in the source file, conversion
to the destination file is as follows:
• Settings of different elements (Phase TOC High 1, 2 and 3) that belong to different setting groups in the source file are
copied into elements that belong to first group of first three setting groups in the destination file
• Protection elements in the other groups/setting groups are configured with default values in the destination file.
SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6
Phase TOC High G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3

Function ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED

Input PHASOR(DFT)

4-24 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Pickup Level 0.10 1.50 1,00 2.00 1.00

1.00
Curve Definite IEEE Ext Definite time IEEE Ext Inv Definite time IEEE Ext Inv
time Inv
TD Multiplier 0.02 1.00 0.05 1,00 0.10 1.00

Reset INSTANTANEOUS
Voltage DISABLED
Restraint
Snapshot ENABLED
Events

4.1.6.6 Properties
When this option is selected, the program displays the relay model information, firmware version, etc. of the file being
edited, as shown:

Figure 4-10: File properties menu

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-25

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.6.7 Print options

The printing options are active only in offline mode with a file open, and not in online mode, connected with the relay.

Print setup
Option to configure the printer options and settings.

Print preview
Option to preview the whole settings and configuration file (*.650) in paper format to be printed as shown:

Figure 4-11: Print preview of settings file

Print
Option to print the relay configuration using the PC default (active) printer on port COMx or LPT. This option is active only in
offline mode and in file edition (not in online mode while connected to the relay).

Print to file (*xls)

Option to export the configuration file to an Excel file.

4-26 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.6.8 Compare to settings file

This tool provides an automatic comparison of two different configuration files, or of an online unit to one settings file.
Open the source *.650 file and select the version and model to compare against. The results of the comparison are
displayed as shown:

Figure 4-12: Compare to settings file

4.1.6.9 PLC checksum calculation

When working in offline mode, the PLC Checksum calculation option calculates the CRC of the PLC equations and Relay
configuration section for the open *.650 file. When a *.650 file is uploaded to the relay, the calculated PLC Checksum and
the actual value of the PLC Checksum read from the relay (Actual values > Status > System Info) must match.
In order to calculate this checksum, the following sections of the * .650 file are considered:
• All equations compiled in the file and located in EnerVista 650 Setup Setpoint > Logic configuration
• Configuration available in the file and located in EnerVista 650 Setup Setpoint > Relay configuration, excluding:
– HMI tab configuration
– All configured text
– Opening and closing time in the Switchgear section

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-27

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.6.10 Setting checksum calculation

When working in offline mode, the Settings Checksum calculation option calculates the CRC of different configured
settings for the open *.650 file. When a *.650 file is uploaded to the relay, the calculated Settings Checksum and the actual
value of the Settings Checksum read from the relay (Actual values > Status > System Info) must match.
In order to calculate this checksum, the following sections of the * .650 file are considered:
• All settings in the relay configuration section (Setpoint > Relay configuration) excluding:
– Those communication settings: Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication settings > SerialPorts or
Network (Ethernet) or Modbus Protocol or Routing
– Relay calibration factors
– Opening and closing time in the Switchgear section

4.1.7 Setpoint menu

Setpoint
Product Setup Communications settings for all protocols and physical mediums. ModBus user map
definition, fault report, oscillography, data logger demand settings and Time Settings.
System Setup General Settings, Flex Curves Definition, Breaker settings, maintenance, switchgear
snapshot events management and Miscellaneous Settings.
Protection Elements Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative Sequence Current Settings.
Voltage Elements settings and Power Settings management.
Control Elements Setting groups, under- and over-frequency settings, synchrocheck, autoreclose, breaker
failure, VT fuse failure, broken conductor, locked rotor settings management, Pulse
Counters, Analog comparators, Frequency Rate of Change, Load encroachment, max
number of starts, Digital Counters, Cold Load Pickup and PLC Timer Masks
Inputs/Outputs Contact I/O settings for all boards available in device, Remote Comms Force Outputs and
Virtual inputs.
Quick Settings Menu that encompass the most important settings to configure the device such as;
Current and Voltage sensing or current protection element.
Relay Configuration Configuration of Outputs, LEDs, Operations, Protection Elements, Oscillography, Control
Events, Control Elements, Switchgear, Inputs, Virtual Inputs, Operations and HMI. Whole
relay configuration with internal relay signals or user-definable ones as logic (virtual
outputs).
Logic Configuration Logic configuration graphic editor (PLC Editor). It is a PLC Project file editor that contains all
the internal drawings used to make the logic (virtual outputs) based on IEC 61131-3
standard. Functional block diagram (FDB).
Procome Procome Configuration tool. Only available for Procome models (5) when communicating
Configuration through Ethernet with EnerVista 650 Setup
IEC103 Configuration IEC103 settings for available IEC103 models (3) when communicating through Ethernet
with Enervista 650 Setup
Clock (*) Relay synchronization to computer clock or to user-definable date and time. Online mode
only.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4-28 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.7.1 Product setup menu

Product Setup
Communication Serial Ports, Network (Ethernet), ModBus Protocol, DNP Slave, IEC 870-5-104, SNTP settings
Settings and procome (if available on model selection), PTP1588 and Routing (for firmware version
7.00 and higher)
ModBus User Map ModBus user map definition. The ModBus user map is formed by 256 records, selectable
from the complete relay ModBus map.
Fault Report Fault report settings. Possibility to show fault reports on HMI screen.
Oscillography Oscillography settings (trigger position, samples per cycle, etc.). The trigger and digital
channels (up to 16) must be configured in Setpoint > Relay configuration.
Data Logger Data logger configuration
Demand Demand settings. The demand trigger and demand reset signals must be configured in
Setpoint > Relay configuration
Time Settings Time settings.

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.7.2 Communication settings menu

This section details the settings related to communication parameters for the different protocols available in the F650.

Communication
Settings
Serial Ports Baud rate and parity for COM1 and COM2 serial communication ports.
Network (Ethernet) Ethernet communication parameters for ETH_1/ETH2 or ETH_E/ETH_A/ETH_B
(Depending on model) (IP Address, Netmask, Gateway IP)

NOTE: The ModBus Slave address used by Ethernet ports is the one set for
COM2.EnerVista 650 Setup software allows programming two different Ethernet
addresses, but the first IP has always to be set as the second IP Address is an Alias.
ModBus Protocol ModBus Slave Addresses for serial and Ethernet communication and the ModBus port
number used for ModBus TCP/IP
DNP3 Slave Physical port, Slave Address for DNP, IP Addresses for Masters, TCP/UDP Port,
Unsolicited Response parameters, Analog scale factors and deadbands, message
fragment size, Binary input block.Available for standard and IEC61850 models.
IEC 870-5-104 TCP Port, Common Addr of ASDU, Cyclic Meter Period and, Synchronization Event
settings.Available for standard and IEC61850 models.
SNTP (*) Synchronization over Ethernet settings
PROCOME Comm port and slave number for procome protocol. Only available for
procome models (5).
PTP 1588 Precision Time Protocol 1588 settings. (Available on fw version 7.00 or higher)
Routing A default route and a maximum number of 6 static routes may be configured. The
default route is used as the last choice, if no other route towards a given destination is
found.This option is only available for version 7.00 and higher.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-29

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.7.3 System setup menu

System Setup
General Settings This screen describes and enables the settings of the power system where the relay
operates. Some of these settings are used only for metering values presentation purposes;
however, some of them apply directly to the sampling and analog-digital conversion
process (rated frequency setting). Therefore, these settings need to be adjusted to fit the
system settings.
Flex Curves Flex Curves – Programmable user curves: The relay incorporates 4 user curves called Flex
Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user in Setpoint >
System Setup > Flex Curves > Edit Curve menu in EnerVista 650 Setup. User defined flex
curves can be selected as an operation curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the
relay.
Breaker Breaker Configuration
Switchgear Configuration of snapshot events for each switchgear (enable or disable)
Miscellaneous Settings This screen contains settings related with relay working mode. Out of service setting, Local/
Remote mode and Active language mode are options listed below.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.7.4 Breaker menu

Breaker settings Breaker settings, maintenance and switchgear selection of the device configured as breaker in the F650. The
selected switchgear is used in recloser, breaker failure and synchronism functions. The settings are Number of
Switchgear, Maximum KI2t, KI2t Integ. Time, Maximum Openings, Max.Openings 1 hour and Snapshot Events.
Breaker maintenance These settings correspond to the initialization of (KI)2t counters, and the counting of number of openings and
closings of the switchgear configured as breaker. These Counters allow the breaker Maintenance. They are
used to cumulate the breaker aging produced by a trip or a breaker opening. In order to incorporate the
breaker historic, in case of existing breakers, the system allows assigning an initial value to accumulated
amperes, and to the number of opening and closing operations.

4.1.7.5 Protection elements menu

This option shows all protection elements available in the relay as shown in the following two tables (exact menu depends
on firmware version).
For firmware versions below 7.50, each group of protection elements includes the specific protection units of the same
type. For example phase currents group includes TOC, IOC, directional units, etc. There are three groups available, so there
are three protection units of each function that can work in grouped mode or ungrouped (altogether).

Table 4-4: Protection elements menu, firmware version below 7.50

Protection
Elements
Phase Current All overcurrent functions for phase current.
Neutral Current All overcurrent functions for neutral current. (Calculated from phases, not measured)
Ground Current All overcurrent functions for ground current. (Measured from 4th current input)
Sensitive Ground All overcurrent functions for sensitive ground current. (Measured from 5th current input)
Current
Negative Sequence All Negative sequence overcurrent functions.
Current
Voltage Elements All voltage functions for phases, neutral, ground and auxiliary voltage
Power Forward power, directional power and wattmetric ground fault (High and Low) protection
functions.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4-30 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

For firmware version 7.50 and above, there are six setting groups of protection elements. Protection element groups are
within each setting group.

Table 4-5: Protection elements menu, firmware version 7.50 or above

Protection
Elements
Setting Group 1 All protection functions available when setting group 1 is the active group
Setting Group 2 All protection functions available when setting group 2 is the active group
Setting Group 3 All protection functions available when setting group 3 is the active group
Setting Group 4 All protection functions available when setting group 4 is the active group
Setting Group 5 All protection functions available when setting group 5 is the active group
Setting Group 6 All protection functions available when setting group 6 is the active group

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

For firmware version 7.5 and above, the specific protection element menus shown are available under each setting group.
For firmware versions below 7.5, these menus are located directly under the Protection Element menu.

Table 4-6: Protection elements in each setting group

Phase Current
Phase TOC High Phase time overcurrent, high level (51PH)
Phase TOC Low Phase time overcurrent, low level (51PL)
Phase IOC High Phase instantaneous overcurrent, high level (50PH)
Phase IOC Low Phase instantaneous overcurrent, low level (50PL)
Phase Directional Phase directional unit (67P). Quadrature Voltage for polarization
Thermal Model Thermal model or Thermal image unit for phases (49)
Neutral Current
Neutral TOC Neutral time overcurrent (51N)
Neutral IOC Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)
Neutral Directional Neutral directional unit (67N). Voltage, current and dual polarization.
Ground Current
Ground TOC Ground time overcurrent (51G)
Ground IOC Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G)
Ground Directional Ground directional unit (67G). Voltage, current and dual polarization.
Sensitive Ground
Current
Sensitive Ground TOC Sensitive ground time overcurrent (51SG).
Sensitive Ground IOC Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent (50SG).
Isolated Ground IOC Isolated ground overcurrent (50IG)
Sensitive Ground Sensitive ground directional unit (67SG)
Directional
Negative
Sequence
Current
Negative Sequence Negative sequence time overcurrent (46P)
TOC
Voltage
Elements
Phase UV Phase undervoltage (27P)

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-31

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Phase OV Phase overvoltage (59P)

Neutral OV High Neutral overvoltage, high level (59NH)
Neutral OV Low Neutral overvoltage, low level (59NL)
Negative Sequence OV Negative sequence overvoltage (47)
Auxiliary OV Auxiliary overvoltage (59X)
Auxiliary UV Auxiliary undervoltage (27X)
Power
Forward Power Forward power (32FP), in primary values.
Directional Power Directional power (32), in primary values.
Watt Gnd Flt High Wattmetric ground fault high (32N High), in secondary values
Watt Gnd Flt Low Wattmetric ground fault low (32N Low), in secondary values

Firmware version 7.50 and above also include Frequency and Miscellaneous menus in the Protection Element section.

Frequency
Underfrequency Underfrequency unit (81U).
Overfrequency Overfrequency unit (81O).
Frequency Rate of Frequency rate of change function (81R).
Change
Miscellaneous
Broken Conductor Broken or fallen conductor detection function (I2/I1). Grouped element. Ratio between
the negative sequence current, I2, and the positive sequence current I1. In normal and
balanced load situations, this ratio is zero, while in severe load fault conditions, an
unbalance is produced and this ratio is increased.
Locked Rotor Locked rotor detection function (48).
Load Encroachment Load Encroachment function.

4-32 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.7.6 Control elements menu

This option shows all protection elements available in the relay as shown in the following two tables (exact menu depends
on firmware version).

Table 4-7: Control elements menu, firmware version below 7.50

Control Elements
Setting Group Control elements can be used in either a single setting group (default mode-all units can
operate simultaneously) or three setting groups (elements are grouped in three
independent tables, with only one active at a given time).
Underfrequency Underfrequency unit (81U). Grouped element.
Overfrequency Overfrequency unit (81O). Grouped element.
Synchrocheck Synchronism check unit (25). Single element.
Autoreclose Recloser (79). Single element.
Breaker Failure Breaker failure (50BF). Single element
VT Fuse Failure Fuse Failure (VTFF). Single element.
Broken Conductor Broken or fallen conductor detection function (I2/I1). Grouped element.
Ratio between the negative sequence current, I2, and the positive sequence current I1. In
normal and balanced load situations, this ratio is zero, while in severe load fault conditions,
an unbalance is produced and this ratio is increased.
Locked Rotor Locked rotor detection function (48). Grouped element.
Pulse Counters Pulse counters function. 8 counters provided.
Analog Comparators Analog comparator function. 20 analog comparators provided.
Frequency Rate of Frequency rate of change function (81R). Grouped element.
Change
Load Encroachment Load Encroachment function. Grouped element.
Max. Number of Starts Maximum Number of Starts (66). Single element.
Digital Counters Up to 8 Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup Cold Load Pickup Function. Not grouped, a single unit provided (Available starting on
firmware version 7.00).
PLC Timer Masks Configuration of masks that can be assigned to PLC timers

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-33

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Table 4-8: Control elements menu, firmware version 7.50 and above
Control Elements
Setting Group F650 incorporate a flexible grouping capability for protection units can be used in either
single setting group (default mode- All units that belong to Active group, configured in
Setpoint > Control > Setting Group, can operate simultaneously ) or up to six setting groups
(in this mode, all protection elements, that are available when setting group function is
disabled, will be available in each individual setting group (Up to maximum of 6). Only one
of setting group will be active at a given time). Units grouped under Protection elements
section will be the units affected by changing of setting group.
Synchrocheck Synchronism check unit (25). Single element.
Autoreclose Recloser (79). Single element.
Breaker Failure Breaker failure (50BF). Single element.
VT Fuse Failure Fuse Failure (VTFF). Single element.
Pulse Counters Pulse counters function. 8 counters provided.
Analog Comparators Analog comparator function. 20 analog comparators provided.
Max. Number of Starts Maximum Number of Starts (66). Single element.
Digital Counters Up to 8 Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup Cold Load Pickup Function. Single element. Available for firmware version 7.00 and above.
PLC Timer Masks Configuration of masks that can be assigned to PLC timers
60 CTS Failure Current transformer failure function
2nd HRMC Inhibit Second harmonic inhibit

4.1.7.7 Inputs/Outputs menu

Section that contains the settings for all input and output boards and the Force Outputs and Virtual inputs activation tools.
Inputs/Outputs
Contact I/O Inputs and outputs settings for all boards in F650. The I/O settings configuration can only
be performed through EnerVista 650 Setup, not available through the HMI.
Force Outputs (*) This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay, to facilitate maintenance
testing. Online mode only.
Virtual Inputs (*) This menu allows operating virtual inputs. These variables are used as inputs to logic
schemes configured in the relay. Virtual inputs can be operated in a latched mode (32
latched virtual inputs) or in Self-reset mode (32 self reset virtual inputs).
Remote Comms. This menu allows configuring remote inputs coming from other devices and allow
enabling None, GSSE or GOOSE messages. Available for IEC61850 (6) models only.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only
This section shows the settings related to inputs and outputs for the different boards available in F650 (F, G, H, J)
Contact I/O
Board F Board located in first slot, always connected.
Board G Board located in second slot, depending on model definition. If model is type G0 there is no
board in second slot.
Board H Board located in first slot of CIO Module (external inputs/outputs module)
Board J Board located in second slot of CIO Module (external inputs/outputs module)

4-34 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.7.8 Quick settings menu

This menu allows quick access to the main Setpoints of the relay.

Figure 4-13: Quick Settings

4.1.7.9 Relay configuration menu

This is the relay configuration section in which the relay can be configured using internal states or already compiled
equation on PLC Editor.

Relay
Configuration
Outputs Configuration of contact output operate and reset signals for all boards.
LEDs 15 LEDs fully configurable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. First 5 LEDs
are latched by hardware, the rest are self-reset but can be latched through PLC
configuration. For firmware version 7.20 and higher, all 15 LEDs can be latched by setting.
From the LED configuration screen, it is possible to print the vertical LED label for the relay.
Operations Configurable operations up to 24. Operation texts, interlocks, final states, frontal keys, time
outs and masters.
Protection Elements This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different protection
elements. To block, reset, initiate the different protection elements inputs.
Control Elements This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different control elements.
Oscillography Trigger and up to 16 digital channels to be included in oscillography records, are
programmable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. Text configuration is only
for offline mode.
NOTE: This screen is used for the configuration of digital channels and oscillography
trigger. The rest of parameters, such as function enabling/disabling, sampling rate,
number of oscillography files, etc. must be set on the Setpoint > Product Setup >
Oscillography menu.
Control Events Up to 128 user programmable events from any logical variable, contact or virtual input.
Possibility to display the event as an alarm on the alarms panel. Control events are also
displayed in the snapshot events recording. 1 ms time tagging.
A control event is a logic signal associated with an operand or combination of operands,
that allows following the status of that signal.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-35

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Switchgear Up to 16 configurable switchgear elements. A switchgear element can be a breaker, a line

selector switch, a grounding selector switch, a busbar selector switch, etc. This screen
allows configuration of type of contacts, opening and closing time, contact assignation
and text for events related to switchgear. There are 64 pre-established events for
switchgear, which correspond to opening, closing, Error01 and Error11 of the 16
programmable switchgear elements.
Remote outputs Up to 32 DNA bits and 64 user St bits to be transmitted to remote devices over CAN using
GSSE messages
Inputs Text configuration for offline mode file management for all the contact inputs available in
device.
Virtual Inputs Text configuration for offline mode file management. 32 latched and 32 self reset virtual
inputs.
MMI (HMI-Human Screen one line diagram configuration. This menu shows a canvas to draw a simplified
Machine Interface) one-line diagram of a bay in a feeder, line, transformer, etc. The menu includes a library for
power elements, metering elements, text and drawings. See an example on the next page.
The following figures show an example of the default factory configuration for F650:

Figure 4-14: Relay configuration

4-36 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Figure 4-15: HMI configuration

4.1.7.10 Logic Configuration menu

This logic configuration allows creating more complex configurations, using the graphical PLC, than using the tables from
Relay Configuration. For file management detailed information go to section 4.1.4 File management menu.
File description:
*.pep:Header for Logic project: PLC project file containing the necessary information relative to the relay model, logic
libraries included in the project (*.lib), graphic file name (*.aut), etc.
*.aut:PLC Project file containing all the drawings used by the logic, required by 650 relay based on IEC 61131-3 standard.
Functional block diagram (FDB).
*.lib:User programmable logic objects: Library file to be included as an object in a PLC project. Logic packages that can be
stored into libraries and be distributed in different PLC projects.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-37

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.7.11 IEC 103 Configuration menu

This menu allows to update the IEC 103 configuration of the unit.

Figure 4-16: IEC 103 Configurator

See chapter 5.13

4.1.7.12 Clock menu

This menu allows updates to the date and time of the relay, either synchronizing them with the PC clock, or entering the
information manually.

Figure 4-17: Clock

4-38 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.8 Actual values menu

The menu bar in the main screen of EnerVista 650 Setup software shows the ACTUAL menu option. This option
concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering, counters information, oscillography,
events, fault locator, etc. This section shows only the structure of menus in EnerVista 650 Setup.

Actual
Front Panel The relay front LED status is shown on this menu.
Status Protection and control status signals for all available protection functions in device.
Metering All metering values available in device. Primary and secondary values, frequency and
phasor diagram provided.
Inputs/Outputs All input and output status provided. For contact inputs and contact outputs as well as
virtual input and virtual output signals.
Records Only enabled in online mode, retrieval of all the available records in device. Snapshot
events, control events, oscillography and fault reports.

4.1.8.1 Front panel

The front panel menu shows the LEDs submenu where all the front LEDs can be monitored.

4.1.8.2 Status
The following menu includes all the available protection status in the device. Location of different menus can vary
depending firmware version.

status
Operation Bits Up to 24 elements. OPERATION BIT XX is (0) when the configured time out for the operation
XX expires or when success conditions are met. And it is (1) if operation XX is executed and
interlocks are fulfilled.
Breaker Breaker status (open, closed or undefined). The rest of the status signals corresponding to
the switchgear XX configured as breaker are in the Status > Switchgear Status >
Switchgear XX menu.
Protection Status of all the protection units in the device.
Control Elements Status of all the control units available in the device.
Protection Summary This screen shows a complete list of all protection and control elements in the relay,
showing their status (enabled or not).
Snapshots Events Summary of the snapshot events status (enabled or disabled) for protection, control, inputs
summary and outputs boards and switchgear.
ModBus User Map Up to 256 elements. Value in SIGNED INT 16 BIT format of the reading for the selected
address configured in Setpoint > Product Setup > ModBus User Map
Switchgear Status Up to 16 blocks of switchgear status signals for the 16 configurable devices. Status signals
such as inputs for A and B contacts, status for A and B, open and close status, error 00 and
error 11, open init and close init, fail to open and fail to close signals.
Calibration Internal states for calibration. Factory calibration and calibration error signals.
FlexCurves Flex curve status for A, B, C and D user curves. (0) if it is not configured, (1) if it is configured.
To configure a flex curve go to Setpoint > System Setup > Flex Curves menu.
System Info This screen can monitor the system parameters and the internal status of the Relay
operating system. Not enabled by default, password required
Records Status Information related to the different records stored in the Relay, such as: Fault reports,
control events, oscillography, data logger, demand, energy, and breaker maintenance.
SNTP-IRIG_B & PTP Information related to synchronization via IRIG_B, SNTP or PTP1588.
1588
Versions Information related to the different firmware versions and hardware revisions.
Redundancy Information related to the status of the frames sent through PRP and HSR. Also information
related to the status of RSTP port.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-39

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Table 4-9: Protection elements, actual values menu

Protection
Protection Blocks This screen shows all the protection element blocks available. Protection elements block
signals can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Phase Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent and directional protection functions for phase current.
Neutral Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent and directional protection functions for neutral current (calculated from
phases).
Ground Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent and directional protection functions for ground current (measured from 4th
current input).
Sensitive Ground Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent, instantaneous
Current overcurrent, isolated and directional protection functions for ground current (measured
from 5th current input).
Negative Sequence Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for negative sequence time overcurrent
Current function.
Thermal Model Protection status signals for thermal model. Reset, alarm and operation signals for phases
and for unit, besides the thermal image values in percentage for all phases and units.
Voltage Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for all voltage functions, undervoltage,
overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage and auxiliary under and
over voltage.
Power Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for forward, directional and wattmetric
ground fault (high and low) power units, and power factor status. Power values for 32N
High and Low functions (in watts).

Table 4-10: Control elements, actual values menu, firmware versions below 7.50
Control Elements
Frequency Status signals (pickups and operations) for under, overfrequency and frequency rate of
change units.
Synchrocheck Status signals for synchrocheck function (25).
Autoreclose Status signals for autoreclose function (79). Close signal, recloser status (ready, lockout,
etc.), block signals after each shot.
Breaker Failure Status signals for breaker failure function (50BF).
VT Fuse Failure Fuse failure detection signal.
Broken Conductor Status signals (pickups and operations) for broken conductor (I2/I1).
Setting Groups Status signals (activations and blocks) for the relay setting group change. By default the
"setting group" setting is disabled and all the grouped elements can be enabled at the
same time.
Locked Rotor Status signals (pickups and operations) for locked rotor units.
Pulse Counters Status signals for pulse counters units.
Analog Comparator Status signals for analog comparator units.
Load Encroachment Status signals (pickups and operations) for load encroachment units.
Max. Number of Starts Status signal for number of starts operations
Digital Counters Status signals for the Digital Counter units.

Cold Load Pickup Status signals for the Cold Load Pickup Function.

4-40 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

Table 4-11: Control elements, actual values menu, firmware version 7.50 and above
Control Elements
Frequency Status signals (pickups and operations) for under, overfrequency and frequency rate of
change units.
Synchrocheck Status signals for synchrocheck function (25).
Autoreclose Status signals for autoreclose function (79). Close signal, recloser status (ready, lockout, etc.),
block signals after each shot.
Breaker Failure Status signals for breaker failure function (50BF).
VT Fuse Failure Fuse failure detection signal.
Broken Conductor Status signals (pickups and operations) for broken conductor (I2/I1).
Setting Groups Status signals (activations and blocks) for the relay setting group change. By default the
Setting Groups setting is disabled and all the grouped elements can be enabled at the same
time.
Locked Rotor Status signals (pickups and operations) for locked rotor units.
Pulse Counters Status signals for pulse counters units.
Analog Comparator Status signals for analog comparator units.
Load Encroachment Status signals (pickups and operations) for load encroachment units.
Max. Number of Starts Status signal for number of starts operations
Digital Counters Status signals for the Digital Counter units.
Cold Load Pickup Status signals for the Cold Load Pickup Function.
60CTS Failure Status signals of Current transformer failure Function
2nd HRMC Inhibit Status signals of Second Harmonic Inhibit Function

Table 4-12: Records status, actual values menu

Record Status
Fault Reports This menu shows the fault report status signals, as fault report trigger, fault date, fault type
and location, besides the fault report number.
Control Events Status of the control events (if the signal configured to launch the control event is active or
not).
Oscillography Status of signals related to oscillography recording, such as status or digital channels,
oscillography trigger, number of records available, etc.
Data Logger Data logger information about oldest and newest sample time stamp, and number of
channels and days configured in data logger settings.
Demand Demand trigger and reset inputs status.
Energy Freeze, unfreeze and reset input signals for energy counters.
Breaker Maintenance All signals related to breaker maintenance, such as number of openings, closings, (KI)2t
counters, alarm signal for (KI)2t, etc.

4.1.8.3 Metering
The Metering menu includes all the measurements available in the device. Primary and secondary values, and also the
data related to the recording functions in the relay

metering
Primary Values Primary values measurements for currents, voltages, power, energy and demand
Secondary Values Secondary values measurements for currents, voltages and power.
Phasor Diagram Current, voltage and sequence components.
Frequency Line and Bus frequencies.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-41

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.8.4 Inputs/Outputs menu

The Inputs/Outputs menu includes all the inputs and outputs signals available in the device. Contact and virtual type.

inputs/outputs
Contact Inputs Status of digital inputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay model.
Contact Output Status Status of digital outputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay model.
Contact Outputs Status (activated or not) of the variables used to operate a contact output. To configure
Operates these signals go to Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs menu.
Contact Outputs Status (activated or not) of the variables used to reset a contact output. To configure these
Resets signals go to Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs menu. This output reset
Command is only effective if latch is selected for Output Type setting on the I/O board,
thus the contact output has been configured to emulate function 86 (latching relay).
IO Board Status Status of I/O boards. This status provides if the hardware it is OK (boards matching relay
model, correctly inserted in their tracks, in good state and communicating through the
internal CAN bus).
Virtual Inputs Status of Virtual inputs latched (32) and self-reset (32).
Virtual Outputs Status of virtual outputs (configured in PLC Editor). Up to 512.
Remote Outputs States of remote outputs for IEC61850 models.
Remote Inputs Status of remote device and remote inputs for IEC61850 models.
Analog Inputs (*) Measurements coming from analog inputs (DCMA)
Virtual Output Latched Status of Virtual Output Latched (configured in PLC Editor). Up to 16.
Virtual output Status of Virtual Output Analogues configured in PLC Editor). Up to 49 float values and 49
Analogue integer values can be used.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.8.5 Records menu

The Records menu is only available in online mode and includes the possibility to retrieve all the records available in the
device. By serial or Ethernet.

Records (*)
Event recorder (*) Retrieval and visualization of snapshot event (all and new), control events and alarm panel.
By serial or Ethernet (ModBus RTU or TCP/IP)
Waveform capture (*) Retrieval of oscillography files, by Ethernet.
Fault Report (*) Retrieval and visualization of fault report files, by Ethernet.
Data logger (*) Retrieval and visualization of data logger files. Only by Ethernet.

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4-42 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

4.1.9 Operations menu

Option only available in online mode, showing all the operations previously configured in the relay with their corresponding
texts, which must be different from the default text (Op_X not configured).

operations
Operation 1 (*) Entry to first operation (with its corresponding text)
... ...
Operation 24 (*) Entry to 24th operation (with its corresponding text)
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.10 Communications menu

The communication menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update
procedures available in device: firmware, operating system, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and
download info files to/from relay).
For more detail information go to section 4.1.3 Connect to the relay for communication menus description and to section 5
for flash memory update procedures.

Communication
Computer Menu to start communication with the relay.
Modem (**) Configure the unit for remote communications via modem, using a telephone line. This is
only available if the relay is not communicating and if modem has been selected under
Communication > Computer control type.
Troubleshooting (*) Read/write to ModBus addresses, for verifying communications and access to different
positions in the ModBus memory map. Only available if the communication has already
been established.
Calibration (*) Retrieve the unit calibration settings and storing them in a file (with extension *.cal). For
reading or storing the calibration settings in the relay go to Communications >
Calibration > Get or Set calibration settings and select the intended calibration file. The
calibration retrieval process must be performed before updating the operating system.
When the firmware and bootcode are updated, all the data in the relay is deleted,
including the factory calibration settings. When only the firmware is updated (for versions
higher than 1.50), the calibration settings are automatically saved in the relay.
Upgrade relay (**) Upgrade firmware version (Ethernet connection): Update the relay firmware through
Ethernet communication. Firmware is related to the relay internal program, designed by
GE Multilin, which performs the protection and control functions, and which is run by the
relay main microprocessor.
Upgrade 650 web Upgrade 650 web server (Ethernet connection): Go to Communications > Upgrade 650
server web server. The relay web server application can be updated to further versions (if
available) using this menu without modifying the relay operating system.
Upload info files to Upload info files to relay (Ethernet connection): This functionality is used to store setting
relay files (*.650) inside the relay, as well as auxiliary files used by the programmable logic
graphical editor (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
Download info files Download info files from relay (Ethernet connection): This functionality is used for
from relay retrieving the files (*.650 and *.pep, *.aut, *.lib) that have been previously stored in the
relay flash memory.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-43

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

CAREFULLY READ THE FLASH MEMORY UPDATE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED IN SECTION

CAUTION “BOOT CODE AND FIRMWARE” AND CLOSE ALL RUNNING APPLICATIONS BEFORE
PERFORMING FIRMWARE AND OPERATING SYSTEM UPDATES.

For firmware versions below 7.00, check that the firmware version that is going to be
NOTICE updated matches the operating system version of the relay before updating firmware. If
not, update the operating system before proceeding to update the firmware. Other
combinations of firmware and operating system different from the listed in section 5 will
not be operative.
For previous version than 7.00 the operating system version is available in the logotype
main screen in HMI; it is the number between brackets in the first line, e.g. F650 1.70 (2.35).
The operating system version is 2.35

*.650 files contain protection, control settings, relay configuration and compiled logic equations. This
NOTICE file can be retrieved from the relay, using the File > Get info from relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
(through serial or Ethernet communication). File > Send info to relay option stores this *.650 file in
the relay.
*.pep, *.aut and *.lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the logic
(virtual outputs) in the relay. These files can be stored in the relay, using the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through Ethernet communication). They can
be retrieved using Communication > Download info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
program (Ethernet communication). Take into account that the *.pep, *.aut and library files are
necessary to modify the PLC logic (virtual outputs). Without these files setting and configuration can
be modified but not logic equations (virtual outputs). It is advisable to use the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option to store these logic configuration files into the relay.
*.pep, *.aut and *.lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the logic
(virtual outputs) in the relay. These files can be stored in the relay, using the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through Ethernet communication). They can
be retrieved using Communication > Download info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
program (Ethernet communication). Take into account that the *.pep, *.aut and library files are
necessary to modify the PLC logic (virtual outputs). Without these files setting and configuration can
be modified but not logic equations (virtual outputs). It is advisable to use the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option to store these logic configuration files into the relay.

4-44 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE

An example of Communication > Troubleshooting follows:

Figure 4-18: Communication troubleshooting example

4.1.11 Security menu

The security menu includes all the menus related to security control in EnerVista 650 Setup. EnerVista 650 Setup security
users and passwords are not related to passwords in HMI. Each security level has its own access for HMI management and
EnerVista 650 Setup management.

security
Login User (*) Log on menu for EnerVista 650 Setup. Enabled after security control has been enabled in
user management menu.
Change Password (*) Menu to change passwords and establish password recovering questions.
User Management (*) User management dialog box.

(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-45

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.1.12 View menu

The view menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update procedures
available in device: firmware, operating system, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and download info
files to/from relay).
The ModBus memory map is detailed in the complete instruction manual (English only) and can be obtained from EnerVista
650 Setup program.

View
Traces (*) ModBus communication traces between the EnerVista 650 Setup and the relay.
ModBus Memory map Complete ModBus memory map description.
Languages (**) Option to change the EnerVista 650 Setup default language. Only available if the relay is
not communicating and no file (*650) is open.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.13 Help menu

Complete instructions manual and data about EnerVista 650 Setup release.

Help
Instruction Manual Instructions manual in the language selected in View > Languages.
GE Mulitlin on the Web GE Multilin web page link.
About EnerVista 650 Release version and date of the EnerVista 650 Setup program.
Setup

4-46 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The HMI interface consists of several functional panels. The faceplate can be unscrewed to allow easy access to the
removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the display and other cover that protects the front
RS232 Communications port and the commands buttons that can be sealed. The following figure shows the HMI in F650

HMI Interface

DISPLAY & LEDS

Graphic 16x40 or text 4x20 LCD display

Fluorescent backlight to improve visibility
Multicolor programmable LEDs with label panel

KEYPAD & SHUTTLE

Ergonomic programmable keys

Shuttle control for easy navigation
ESC key, built-in ENTER function and audio feedback
Local / Remote / Off pushbutton with LEDs

FRONT PORT

Electrically isolated front RS232 communication port

Transparent cover can be sealed for security

Figure 4-19: HMI interface, available for firmware versions 7.00 and below

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-47

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Figure 4-20: Enhanced HMI interface

4.2.1 Display
F650 units are available with two different options for the front display. The first option is an alphanumerical display of 4
lines with 20 characters each, and the second option is a graphical display of 16 lines with 40 characters each (128x240
pixels).
The boot code and firmware versions can be seen in the relay text main screen, this screen is the default screen in the text
menu for all models: After the text “F650“, appears the relay firmware version (7.00 in the example), and between brackets
the boot program version (7.00 in the example), followed by “General Electric”, the relay model and the default front port
(COM2) communication parameters.

F650 7.00 (7.00)

General Electric
F650MZKF2G1HI6E
19200N81: MODBUS: 254
Figure 4-21: Text main screen

4-48 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.2 LED indicators

The relay provides 16 LED indicators, 15 user programmable plus one non-configurable LED (READY) that shows if the relay
is in service.
Programmable LEDs are divided into groups of 5 LEDs, each of the groups having a different color. The first group of LED
indicators is latched by hardware (red), usually configured for trip signals. The second group (yellow) and third group
(green) of LED indicators are self-reset and will reset once the condition has been cleared. These LEDs can also be latched
using logic through PLC configuration. For firmware version 7.20 and above, all 15 LEDs are latched through relay settings.
The ESC key is used to reset any latched LED indicator, once the condition has been cleared. Keep the ESC button pressed
for more than 3 seconds; all LEDs light up, verifying their correct operation. When releasing the ESC key, all indicators
programmed with memory, such as tripping LEDs, are reset. For models with enhanced display, there is a reset LEDs
button dedicated for this purpose.
The latched conditions can also be reset via communications using the LED reset input (to configure this signal go to
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Control Elements > LED RESET INPUT). By default this LED reset input signal is set to
LEDS RESET operation.

4.2.3 Pushbuttons
The front panel provides:
Push buttons: keypad (5 user programmable plus ESC/ESCAPE non configurable), shuttle key or keypad for easy
navigation, command pushbutton to select operations mode.
RS232/USB port: intended for connection to a portable PC.

4.2.3.1 Keypad and shuttle key

I
This button can be used for closing the user-programmable switchgear. It is fully
programmable by the user.
O This button can be used for closing the user-programmable switchgear. It is fully
programmable by the user.
*
User programmable.
F1
User programmable.

F2 User programmable.

(ESC) Escape key. When pressed for more than 3 seconds, it tests all LEDs and resets the
ESC
trip LEDs.

Rotary knob or Shuttle Key (it can be both rotated and pressed): Used for selecting
menus, sub menus, settings and for confirmation. Press or rotate the shuttle key to
enter the text main menu from the text standby screen.

Figure 4-22: Keypad and shuttle key description, basic display models (not enhanced)

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-49

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

8sed for closing the user programmable

switchgear. It is fully Srogrammable.

8VHGIRUFORVLQJWKHXVHUSURJUDPPDEOH
VZLWFKJHDU,WLVIXOO\SURJUDPPDEOH

F1. User programmable.

F2. User programmable.

F3 / *. User programmable.

Up Key. Used for selecting menus,

submenus, DQGseWtinJV
Down Key. Used for selecting menus,
submenus, and changLQJ values of settings

Enter Key. Press to enter to submenus

or to change values.

Escape key. Press key to exit from menus

Reset key. 3UHVVWR test all LEDs and reset

the trip LEDs.

Figure 4-23: Enhanced keypad description

4-50 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.3.2 Command push button

The unit incorporates a command pushbutton located at the bottom right side of the HMI interface and at the top left for
Enhanced interface, with three options: local, remote, and off. The first option (LOCAL) allows executing operations in local
mode (HMI, front port, and rear COM2 port). The second option (REMOTE) allows operation execution only through remote
communications (COM1 and ETH_1/ETH2 or ETH_E/ETH_A/ETH_B (Depending on model)). The third option (OFF) blocks the
execution of operations. Each position is identified with an LED indicator, as follows:

LOCAL operations (green)

REMOTE operations (green)
OFF (red)

Press the command button to switch from local to remote operations mode and vice versa. OFF status (operation inhibited
for maintenance and safety) can be reach pressing the commands pushbutton during several seconds (local-remote-off
sequence).
The local-remote-off sequence can be also available through communications (see chapter 5.8), with a configurable signal
that can be set in the Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Control Elements screen.

4.2.4 Front port and cover sealing system

The following Figure 4-24: Detail of front port and cover sealing system shows a detail of the front RS232 communication
port and local/remote button access cover sealing system in basic (not enhanced) displays. The sealing system is similar to
the one used in energy meters, using wire and plumb seal. High quality plastic have been used in the design to withstand
extreme environmental conditions, both mechanical and electrical, sun radiation, humidity, etc. in order to guarantee a
long life for the unit.

Cover sealing system

Screen contrast regulator

Electrically isolated RS232 port

Local/remote Operations access

Figure 4-24: Detail of front port and cover sealing system

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-51

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.2.5 Screen contrast

Regulation of screen contrast should be performed as described below depend on display model selected:
Basic HMI: Dedicated screen contrast regulator is located below cover sealing system. See Figure 4-24: Detail of front port
and cover sealing system.
Enhanced HMI: Back light level regulation can be performed by using enhanced keypad. Reset button must be pressed at
the same time that the up or down key is pressed to increase or decrease the contrast.

4.2.6 Text menus

4.2.6.1 Navigation
Text menu is available for all models, this is the main menu for visualizing actual values, metering, changing settings, etc.
through the HMI. In models with graphical display besides this text main menu there are several screens providing more
performance for control purposes.
Press (or rotate left or right) the enter/shuttle key to enter the main menu, starting from the standby screen (default main
screen). The default main screen can be accessed pressing ESC key until it appears. In all the navigation press the enter/
shuttle key to select the desired header display (top-level menu). Each press of the enter/shuttle key advances through the
main heading pages as illustrated below. To return to previous menus press the ESC key. To move inside the top-level
menu without changing to other low levels, rotate the shuttle key left to move up and right to move down (or use up/down
keys).
When rotating the shuttle key (or up/down keys) the selected menu is marked by a single scroll bar character. The mark (>)
in the right part of any menu means that contains more than one level.

Figure 4-25: Text menu navigation Shows an example of main menu navigation:

Figure 4-25: Text menu navigation

4-52 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.6.2 Text menu hierarchy

The structure of HMI text menu is similar to the EnerVista 650 Setup menu in the actual values and settings (view and
change) menus. The main menu shows the following options:

Name Description Navigation in menu

Actual Values Actual values of all the signals available in device. Press shuttle key or enter key to enter next level.
Status of protection and control elements, Press ESC to return to default main screen.
measurements, inputs and outputs, etc.
Snapshot events Visualization of all snapshot events in text mode (two Press shuttle key or enter key to visualize snapshot
screens for each snapshot event). In graphical displays events in text menu. Press ESC to return to default
there can be seen in a dedicated screen. main screen.
Fault Report Fault reports information available in HMI (two screens Press shuttle key or enter key to enter next level.
for each fault report) Move Up/Down to see all the available fault reports
in device. Press shuttle key or enter key to enter
particular information for fault report selected.
View Settings Visualization of all protection and control settings Press shuttle key or enter key to enter next level.
available in device. Move Up/Down to select sub menu. Press ESC to
return to previous level.
Change Settings Menu that allows changing all protection and control Press shuttle key or enter key to enter next level.
settings available in device. Inputs and outputs Move Up/Down to select sub menu. Press esc to
settings, relay configuration and logic configuration return to previous level.
are not available in HMI, only via EnerVista 650 Setup
software.
Date & Time Date and time visualization and modification by user. First mode is visualization. Press again shuttle key
or enter key to start modification in date and time.
Press ESC to return to previous level.
Commands Operations execution in local mode. Move Up/Down to preselect operation. Press
shuttle key or enter key to select and confirm.
Press ESC to return to previous level.
Password Password menu for settings and commands Move Up/Down to select submenu. Press shuttle
key or enter key to enter next level. Press ESC to
return to previous level.
Select Main Screen Selection of default main screen in text menu. Move Up/Down to select the default main screen
type. Press shuttle key or enter key to confirm.
Select Language Language selection. Between default language (see Move Up/Down to select the default language.
order code) and English. Press shuttle key or enter key to confirm selection.
Switch the relay off and on.
< - return Return to previous level Press shuttle key or enter key to return to previous
level.

4.2.6.3 Actual Values

The Actual Values menu option in HMI concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering,
counters information, oscillography, events, fault locator, etc.

Front Panel >

LEDs
Status >
Operation Bits
Breaker

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-53

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Protection > Protection Blocks

Phase Current
Neutral Current
Ground Current
Sens. Ground Current
Neg. Seq. Current
Thermal Model
Voltage
Power
Voltage
Power

Control Elements > Frequency

Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Broken Conductor
Setting Groups
Locked Rotor
Pulse Counters
Analog Comparators
Load Encroachment
Max. Number of starts
Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup

Switchgear Status > Switchgear 1

Switchgear...
Switchgear 16

Calibration
FlexCurves
System Info
Records Status > Fault Reports
Control Events
Oscillography
Data logger
Demand
Energy
Breaker Maintenance

SNTP-IRIG_B-PTP
Versions
Redundancy
Metering >
Primary Values > Current
Voltage
Power
Energy
Demand

Secondary Values > Current

Voltage
Power

Frequency
Inputs/Outputs >
Contact Inputs > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output St. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output Op. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output Rs. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J

4-54 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

IO Board Status
Virtual Inputs > Virtual Inp.Latched
Virtual Inp.SR
Virtual Outputs
Remote Outputs (for DNA
IEC61850 models only) > User St
GOOSE Dig Outputs
Remote Inputs for IEC61850 Remote Input
models only)> Remote Devices
GOOSE Dig Inputs
GOOSE Analog Inputs

Analog Inputs > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J

Virtual out. Latched
Virtual out. Analogue

To enter this menu press the shuttle key or enter key when the option Actual Values is selected in main menu. A secondary
level is displayed with different sub levels as shown on . Pressing Up/down keys or rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving
up and right for moving down) select the next level to be displayed, press the enter/shuttle key again to enter in next level
and press ESC key to return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed the same for all the menus in Actual
Values. Once the last sub level is reached, move up and down to visualize the actual values selected.
One example of data screen for actual values is shown in Figure 4-26: Actual values screen data.
First Line: Header of last level in actual values (Phase Current in the example)
Second Line: Data identifier (in the example PH IOC1 HIGH A, is the pickup signal for the first instantaneous overcurrent
function level high for phase A).
Third line: Status of the displayed actual value.
Fourth Line:Relative position in the menu (it is the first value of 114)

Phase Current
PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP
OFF
(1/114)

Figure 4-26: Actual values screen data

In the Actual Values menus are different types of data; each type of data displays its particular status type (on and off, 0 or
1, OK or fail, analog values, etc.)

4.2.6.4 Snapshot events

To enter this menu press the enter/shuttle key when the option Snapshot events is selected in main menu (). In this menu
all the snapshot events stored can be displayed.
Snapshot events are changes in the relay internal status.
One snapshot event is displayed in two text screens:
The first screen display the status, date and time of the snapshot event: the snapshot event identifier, its status, event
number and the date and time of the occurrence. If the snapshot event identifier does not fit the first line, the whole text is
shown using as well the second line alternating with the status and event number.
The second screen displays currents and voltages in primary values for that particular snapshot event. Ia, Ib, Ic and Ig for
currents and Vab, Vbc, Vca and V0 for voltages. To access the metering screen in snapshot events menu, press shuttle key
from the snapshot event first screen. To exit from the metering screen press ESC.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-55

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

To select different snapshot events to be displayed, press the up-down keys or rotate the shuttle key to select the snapshot
event and then press the enter/shuttle key to enter the metering screen. Press esc to exit the metering screen and return
to snapshot events menu.
Figure 4-27: Snapshot event navigation HMI shows an example of snapshot events navigation:

Press enter/shuttle key from the default main screen and enter in the main text
menu.

Move the shuttle key or press up-down keys until a single scroll bar character
(o) appears in the left part of Snapshot event header.

Press enter/shuttle key to enter in the snapshot events menu)

Select the snapshot event to display using the up/down keys or shuttle key (left
and right to move up and down inside the recorded snapshot events).

Once selected the snapshot event, identifier, status, date and time are
displayed.
In the second line St: is showing the status and the relative snapshot index from
the whole recorded number. Third and fourth lines are used to display the time
and date of the snapshot event.

Pressing the enter/shuttle key the metering screen for the snapshot event is
displayed.
To exit from this screen press the ESC key and return to the snapshot events
menu.
Figure 4-27: Snapshot event navigation HMI

4.2.6.5 Fault report

To enter the Fault Report menu, press the enter/shuttle key when the option Fault report is selected in main menu (). This
menu displays information about the last ten faults recorded in the relay.
The relay HMI can handle fault reports stored in the relay in two different ways:
1. Show fault warning messages on the HMI display when the fault is produced. This option is disabled by default. To
enable the display of warning messages from the HMI go to the menu Change Settings > Product Setup > Fault
Report > Show Fault On HMI and select Enable.
2. Save information from the last ten faults in the relay. View in the HMI Fault Report menu
In the first option, when a fault occurs a warning message is displayed including information about the fault in two
screens, one with general fault information, and a second with the measured values at the time the fault occurred.

4-56 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

The fault-warning message must be acknowledged by the user before performing any other operation. In the event of
several consecutive faults, the HMI shows the most recent fault, however the user needs to acknowledge all faults (up to a
maximum of ten faults).
In the second option, fault reports can be viewed through the HMI Fault Report menu accessed by pressing the enter/
shuttle key. The display shows information from the last ten faults, including both general information and metering
screens for each fault. Displayed information starts with the most recent fault, and previous faults can be viewed by
rotating the enter/shuttle key.
Displayed information is stored in the relay volatile memory, so if the relay is turned off this information is lost, as also
happens if a Clear Fault Report command is executed. However, saved fault reports stored in the relay non-volatile
memory remain after the Fault reset, and can be obtained from the relay using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, Actual >
Records > Fault report.
If there is no fault report available through the display, the relay shows a Fault report not available message.
The format of the displayed screens is as follows:
Select the Fault report menu in text menu

If there is more than one fault record press the up-down keys or rotate the shuttle
key and select the desired record to be displayed.

First screen with general fault information: Fault report #number, fault type,
distance and date and time.

Second screen with metering data for that fault record. All this data is a summary
from the fault report file that can be retrieved via EnerVista 650 Setup software.

Figure 4-28: Fault report navigation in HMI

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-57

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Possible fault types are as follows:

GROUND Ground faults

AG phase A to ground
ABG phase AB to ground
BG phase BG to ground
BCG phase BCG to ground
CG phase CG to ground
CAG phase CAG to ground
PHASE Phase to phase faults
AB phase A to phase B
BC phase B to phase C
CA phase C to phase A
3PHASE Three-phase faults (shown on the display as 3PH)
NAF Fault type not calculated

4.2.6.6 View settings menu

To enter this menu press the enter/shuttle key when the option View Settings is selected in main menu (o). A secondary
level is displayed with different sub levels. Pressing up-down keys or rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving up and right
for moving down) select the next level to be displayed (o), press the enter/shuttle key again to enter in next level and press
esc key to return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed the same for all the menus in "View Settings".
Once the last sub level is reached, move up and down to see the available settings.

MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL

Product Setup >
Communication >
Serial Ports
Ethernet > Ethernet A
Ethernet B
Ethernet E
Redundancy
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave (Available for standard and DNP3 Slave 1..3
IEC61850 models) >
IEC 870-5-104(Available for standard and
IEC61850 models) >
SNTP
PROCOME (Available for procome models
only).
PTP 1588
Routing
Fault Report
Oscillography
Demand
Time Settings
System Setup >
General Settings
Breaker > Breaker Settings
Breaker Maintenance

4-58 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL

Misc. settings
Protection Element >
(*) See note
Phase Current >
Phase TOC High > Phase TOC High 1..3
Phase TOC Low > Phase TOC Low 1..3
Phase IOC High > Phase IOC High 1..3
Phase IOC Low > Phase IOC Low 1..3
Phase Directional > Phase Directional 1..3
Thermal Model > Thermal Model 1..3
Neutral Current >
Neutral TOC > Neutral TOC 1..3
Neutral IOC > Neutral IOC 1..3
Neutral Dir > Neutral Dir 1..3
Ground Current >
Ground TOC > Ground TOC 1..3
Ground IOC > Ground IOC 1..3
Ground Dir > Ground Dir 1..3
Sens. Ground Curr >
Sens. Ground TOC > Sens. Ground TOC 1..3
Sens. Ground IOC > Sens. Ground IOC 1..3
Isolated Gnd IOC > Isolated Gnd IOC 1..3
Sens. Ground Dir > Sens. Ground Dir. 1..3
Neg. Seq. Current >
Neg. Seq. TOC > Neg. Seq. TOC 1..3
Voltage Elements >
Phase UV > Phase UV 1..3
Phase OV > Phase OV 1..3
Neutral OV High > Neutral OV High 1..3
Neutral OV Low > Neutral OV Low 1..3
Neg. Seq. OV > Neg. Seq. OV 1..3
Auxiliary OV > Auxiliary OV 1..3
Auxiliary UV > Auxiliary UV 1..3
Power >
Forward Power > Forward Power 1..3
Directional Power > Directional Power 1..3
Watt Gnd Flt High > Watt Gnd Flt High 1..3
Watt Gnd Flt Low > Watt Gnd Flt Low 1..3
Control elements >
(*) See note
Setting Group
Underfrequency > Underfrequency 1..6
Overfrequency > Overfrequency 1..6
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure.
Broken Conductor > Broken Conductor 1..3
Locked Rotor > Locked Rotor 1..3
Fq Rate of Change Fq Rate of Change 1..3
Load Encroachment Load Encroachment 1..3

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-59

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL

Max. Num of starts
Cold Load Pickup
PLC Timer Masks
(*) This menu changes as indicated in table 4.35 for firmware version 7.50 or above.
Table 4-13: Protection Element and control element menu for firmware version 7.50 or above

MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL MAIN SETTINGS MENU
Protection Element >
Setting Group X >
Phase Current >
Phase TOC High > Phase TOC High 1..3
Phase TOC Low > Phase TOC Low 1..3
Phase IOC High > Phase IOC High 1..3
Phase IOC Low > Phase IOC Low 1..3
Phase Directional > Phase Directional 1..3
Thermal Model > Thermal Model 1..3
Neutral Current >
Neutral TOC > Neutral TOC 1..3
Neutral IOC > Neutral IOC 1..3
Neutral Dir > Neutral Dir 1..3
Ground Current >
Ground TOC > Ground TOC 1..3
Ground IOC > Ground IOC 1..3
Ground Dir > Ground Dir 1..3
Sens. Ground Curr >
Sens. Ground TOC > Sens. Ground TOC 1..3
Sens. Ground IOC > Sens. Ground IOC 1..3
Isolated Gnd IOC > Isolated Gnd IOC 1..3
Sens. Ground Dir. > Sens. Ground Dir. 1..3
Neg. Seq. Current >
Neg. Seq. TOC > Neg. Seq. TOC 1..3
Voltage Elements >
Phase UV > Phase UV 1..3
Phase OV > Phase OV 1
Neutral OV High > Neutral OV High 1..3
Neutral OV Low > Neutral OV Low 1
Neg. Seq. OV > Neg. Seq. OV 1..3
Auxiliary OV > Auxiliary OV 1..3
Auxiliary UV > Auxiliary UV 1
Power >
Forward Power > Forward Power 1..3
Directional Power > Directional Power 1..3

4-60 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

Watt Gnd Flt High > Watt Gnd Flt High 1

Watt Gnd Flt Low > Watt Gnd Flt Low 1..3

Frequency >
Underfrequency > Underfrequency 1..6
Overfrequency > Overfrequency 1..6
Fq Rate of Change > Fq Rate of Change 1..3
Miscellaneous >
Broken Conductor > Broken Conductor 1..3
Locked Rotor > Locked Rotor 1..3
Load Encroachment > Load Encroachment 1..3
Control Elements >
Setting Group
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure.
Max. Num of starts
Cold Load Pickup
PLC Timer Masks
60 CTS Failure
2nd HRMC Inhibit

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-61

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.2.6.7 Change Settings

To enter this menu press the enter/shuttle key when Change Settings is selected in main menu. A secondary level is
displayed with different sublevels. Press up-down key or rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving up and right for moving
down) select the next level to be displayed, press the enter/shuttle key again to enter in next level and press ESC key to
return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed the same for all the menus in Change Settings. Once the
last sub levels is reached, move up and down to visualize the settings selected.
To change a particular setting, press the enter/shuttle key on the setting to be modified. After selecting the setting, the
value for that setting appears between brackets. Choose the new value moving up and down. After selecting the
appropriate value press again the enter/shuttle key to fix that value. To save the new settings, go to the end of the menu
pressing down key or rotating the shuttle key right, and select Press Enter to save settings. When pressing the shuttle key
inside this menu the new settings is saved.

Select the menu Change settings and press the enter/shuttle key to enter in the next
sub levels.

If there is more than one sub levels, select the next sub level by pressing the up-
down keys or rotating and pressing the enter/shuttle key until the last level is
reached.

Press the enter/shuttle key in the function to be modified

-> Group of settings

-> Setting to be modified
-> Value
-> Range and step

Pressing the enter/shuttle key, value appears between brackets and can be
modified pressing the up-down keys or rotating the shuttle key. Pressing again the
enter/shuttle key, the new value is accepted.

Once all settings inside the group have been modified, go to the last screen pressing
the down key or rotating the shuttle key and press Enter. At this moment of time, the
new settings is active in the relay.

Figure 4-29: Change settings in HMI

4-62 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.6.8 Date & time

The “Date & Time” menu shows the relay date and time information in the following format:
DST: Daylight Saving Time information
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
To modify date and time, press the enter/shuttle key. The relay shows the year between brackets at the top of the screen.
By pressing the up-down keys or rotating the shuttle key, reach the desired value for the year, and press the enter/shuttle
key to select and store that value. After the year, the relay shows the month. Proceed as in the case of the year. The date &
time modification sequence is as follows:
Press the up-down key or rotate the shuttle key to select the “Date and Time” menu
and press to enter in it
The date and time data appear in the format described above.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key the year can be modified pressing up-down key or
rotating the shuttle key, after selecting the desired value, press again the enter/
shuttle key to store the value.
“Year”
Date:Day/Month/<Year>
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Year, Month appears between brackets and can be
modified
“Month”
Date:Day/<Month>/Year
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Month, Day appears between brackets and can be
modified
“Day”
Date:<Day>/Month/Year
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Day, Hour appears between brackets and can be
modified
“Hour”
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:<Hour>:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Hour, Minutes appears between brackets and can be
modified
“Minute”
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour:<Minute>:Seconds
After storing the value for Minutes, Seconds appears between brackets and can be
modified
“Second”
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour: Minute:<Seconds>

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-63

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Once this sequence is completed, these values remain stored in the relay, and the display once again shows the date at
the bottom of the text screen.
Figure 4-30: Change date & time in HMI

4.2.6.9 Commands
Commands are configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, and they can be executed using the pushbuttons on the relay front.
Use the EnerVista 650 Setup software to configure up to 24 commands with a descriptive text. When executing the
operations from the relay front panel, the operation description is displayed.
Example of commands (operations) executions via HMI

Press the enter/shuttle key when Commands is selected in the display (o).

All the previously configured commands are displayed. Press up-down keys or
rotate the shuttle key to move through the available commands. Press ESC to
return to previous level.

Press the enter/shuttle key to pre-select the operation to execute.

When the message Push Enter for Confirmation appears, press the enter/shuttle
key to confirm.

Once the command has been performed or the time out has expired the Command
completed message is shown on the display.

Figure 4-31: Commands in HMI

4-64 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.6.10 Passwords
The F650 units incorporate independent passwords for protection and control, in order to prevent unauthorized keypad
and display access to the relay.
Settings Password:
This password restricts access to settings changes in the relay protection elements.
Commands Password:
This password restricts access to executing operation commands through the keypad and display.
If the Commands Password is activated, when the user tries to execute an operation, the relay requests this password.
When using single-line diagrams for graphical display models, all objects are not operational until the password is entered,
either by logging in to Login Pwd Commands, or by entering the password in the Commands menu.
Relay settings view, measures, and other monitored information are not password-protected, and can be accessed by all
users.
The password menu is located at the Password option in the relay text menu. This menu includes the following options:
“Login Pwd Settings”
“Logout Pwd Settings”
“Change Pwd Settings”
“Login Pwd Commands”
“Logout Pwd Commands”
“Change Pwd Commands”
“Forgot Password?”
Among the available options in this menu, there are three types of functionality:
Login: For entering the password, either for settings or commands, and enable access to settings
or commands. Once entering the password the relay is no longer password protected, and
access is enabled to settings modification or commands execution.
Logout: Once the necessary setting changes or operation commands have been executed, the
user can log out, so that the relay is password protected again.
Change: Setting or modifying the desired password.
Forgot Password: Retrieves the encrypted password, so that it can be recovered if the user loses or forgets it.
Passwords are restricted for Settings change and Commands execution. To password-protect the relay, it is first necessary
to set the desired password, using the corresponding Change Pwd... menu. The default password is 0000. This password
provides access to the whole relay functionality.
Once a new password has been set, the user must log in to access the protected functionality; otherwise, the relay
requests the password when trying to change settings or execute commands. Once the password is entered the relay is
unprotected (as if the user had logged in), and remains so for 15 minutes of inactivity or until the user logs out.

Password range
The valid range for F650 passwords is a number from 0000 to 9999.
The default password is 0000, which provides access to the whole relay functionality. This is the default option for enabling
relay use without using passwords.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-65

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Entering passwords (Login PWD)

This operation is the same for both the settings and commands passwords. The only difference is the access menu. For
entering the password, the user must access the Login menus inside the Password menu.
Login Pwd Settings or Login Pwd Commands:
The relay requests the password with the following message on the screen:
Setting passwd.
Login: < 1000 >
For entering the desired password, the user must press up-down key or rotate the shuttle key to the left (decrease) or to
the right (increase), and establish the desired number. Once entered, the selected password between brackets has been
entered, the relay shows the message “Processing passwd. Wait...". If the password is correct, the relay allows access to
the settings change or command execution. It is not necessary to enter the password every time a change is to be
performed. The relay requests the password again after 15 minutes of inactivity. This period of time is the same that takes
the relay to turn off the display back-lighting.

Logging out (Logout PWD)

To disable access to settings and commands, the user must logout.
Logout Pwd Settings or Logout Pwd Commands:
For safety reasons, the relay automatically logs out the active user 15 minutes after the last keypad action.

Changing the password (Change PWD commands)

To set a password in the relay, both for settings and commands, the corresponding menu must be accessed inside the
Password menu:
Change Pwd Settings or Change Pwd Commands:
To change the password, the user must first log in with the existing password; if the relay has the default factory password,
this would be 0000.
The relay requests the existing password with the following message:
(Setting or Command) passwd.
Login: < 0000 >
Once the existing password has been acknowledged, the new password must be entered:
(Setting or Command) passwd.
New passwd: < 1000 >
Once the new password has been entered, the relay returns to the general Passwords menu.

Service Command for password recovery

In the event of losing all passwords, the Service Command allows the customer to reset both Settings and Commands HMI
Passwords.
1. Customer must call the customer support service.
2. A secret key will be provided by customer support to facilitate the reset
3. At the moment, the HMI has no passwords for Settings and Commands. The customer can reintroduce new
passwords.

4-66 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.6.11 Select main screen

The relay display offers the possibility to select the default main screen. For this purpose, the user must access Select Main
Screen through the HMI. This menu includes the following options:

Logotype

This option selects as main screen the relay logotype including the firmware and boot code versions, the relay model and
the communication parameters for local port COM2.

Figure 4-32: Default logotype screen

Metering
This option shows a Metering screen including the phase and ground currents as well as phase-to-phase voltage, and zero
sequence voltage values, all of them in primary values.

Ia 0.000 Vab 0.000

Ib 0.000 Vbc 0.000
Ic 0.000 Vca 0.000
Ig 0.000 V0 0.000

Figure 4-33: Default metering screen

All
This option alternates in time the two previous options.

4.2.6.12 Select language

Option only available for versions 1.70 or higher than 5.20.
The relay display offers the possibility to select the default language for the relay. For this purpose, the user must access
the “Select language” menu located at the end of the main menu through the HMI. This menu allows the user to set the
default language of the relay between English (always available) and second language selected in the relay model.
For example one relay in French language (e.g. FC650MZDF2G1HIRF) can be displayed in French or in English only by
changing the language setting in HMI. It is necessary to switch off and on the relay to start working with the new language
configuration in the relay. In EnerVista 650 Setup it is possible to select the language for the software (View > Languages).
Example of language selection in HMI

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-67

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Press the enter/shuttle key to enter the select language menu.

Depending on the relay model there are different language selections available:
English/French, English/ Russian, etc.

Press up-down keys or rotate the shuttle key to select the desired language and
press enter to store the selection in the relay

Once the new language has been selected it is necessary to reboot the relay in
order to start working with the new language in the device.

Figure 4-34: Language selection in HMI

4.2.7 Graphic display

4.2.7.1 One-line diagram

In models with graphic display default main screen is the single-line diagram. This single-line diagram can be configured
using EnerVista 650 Setup software by choosing the HMI menu inside Relay Configuration (Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > HMI).

F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER

Ia = 0.000 kA Vab =0.000 kV

Ib = 0.000 kA Vbc =0.000 kV

Ic = 0.000 kA Vca =0.000 kV

Freq = 0.00 Hz

Esc: Menu. Enter:Next. :Select

Figure 4-35: One-line diagram

The bottom of the display shows a legend that indicates the possible selections that can be made from this screen.

4-68 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

Esc: Menu. Enter: Next. : Select.

The meaning of these options is as follows:

Esc: Menu.
Press the ESC key to access the relay main menu, similar to the one displayed by the text-display model (F650B).
Press the ESC key again and the menu selection screen (Actual Values, Snapshot events, etc.) is displayed. This main menu
screen is identical to the one described for the text display, with functionality described in section 4.2.6 Text menus.
Intro: Next.
Press the enter/shuttle key to access the next graphical screen, which in this case corresponds to the primary metering
values screen.
: Select
Once the different switchgear elements have been configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, they can be operated from the
graphic display.
If a single-line diagram has been configured in the EnerVista 650 Setup software, in the HMI option inside the Relay
Configuration menu, the different switchgear elements configured for the display are operative from the graphic display.
By pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key to the left and right, the cursor moves among the elements and
blinks on each of them. When an element is selected by pressing the enter/shuttle key, the relay indicates the command to
be executed, and the user needs to confirm by pressing the enter/shuttle key.
The following sections describe only the operation of screens that are specific for the graphic display models.

4.2.7.2 Metering screen

The Metering screen displays relay analog measures in their primary values. Available metering values are as follows:

Metering Screen. Total metering 53

Phasor Ia Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ib Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ic Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ig Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Isg Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ia Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ib Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ic Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ig Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Isg Primary 0.000 KA
I0 Primary 0.000 KA

Enter: Next. ESC: Prev :Scroll.

Figure 4-36: METERING SCREEN

As in the rest of graphical display screens, the bottom part shows a legend that indicates the possible options for the user.
In this case, the options are:
Enter: Next.Esc: Prev. : Scroll.
Intro: Next.
Pressing the enter shuttle key the user accesses the next screen, in this case the ALL EVENTS screen.
Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key the user returns to the previous screen (One-line diagram)
: Scroll.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-69

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key to the left (L) or right (R) the user can access all the Metering values in
the screen.

METERING SCREEN ANALOG MEASURES IN PRIMARY VALUES

Phasor Ia Primary V0 Primary Phase A Real Pwr Line Frequency Primary
Phasor Ib Primary V1 Primary Phase B Reactive Pwr Bus Frequency Primary
Phasor Ic Primary V2 Primary Phase B Apparent Pwr Vx Primary
Phasor Ig Primary Vab Primary Phase B Real Pwr Pos MVarhour Freeze
Phasor Isg Primary Vbc Primary Phase C Reactive Pwr NegMVarhour Freeze
Phasor In Primary Vca Primary Phase C Apparent Pwr PosMWatthour Freeze
RMS Ia Primary Vn Primary Phase C Real Pwr Neg MWatthour Freeze
RMS Ib Primary Va Primary 3 Phase Reactive Pwr Positive MVarhour
RMS Ic Primary Vb Primary 3 Phase Apparent Pwr Negative MVarhour
RMS Ig Primary Vc Primary 3 Phase Real Pwr Positive MWatthour
RMS Isg Primary VL Primary Phase A Power Factor Negative MWatthour
I0 Primary VBB Primary Phase B Power Factor % of Load-to-trip
I1 Primary Phase A Reactive Pwr Phase C Power Factor
I2 Primary Phase A Apparent Pwr 3 Phase Power Factor

4.2.7.3 All events screen

This screen shows all events that have been produced in the relay. The top of the screen shows its name (All Events), and
the relative and total number of events contained in the screen.

All Events (1/479) or (1/511 for Firmware version 7.20 or higher)

This legend means that there are a total of events stored in the relay, and that the cursor is located on event number 1. The
information shown on this screen for each event is as follows:
"Hour:Minute:Second:Millisecond" "Event text" "Event status (ON/OFF)"

All Events (1/479).

- [ Ready LED ON ] -
16:11:08.035 Ready LED ON ON
16:11:08.017 Breaker Closed ON ON
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd2 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd1 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Sens Gnd TOC3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Sens Gnd TOC2 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Sens Gnd TOC1 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Ground TOC3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Ground TOC2 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Ground TOC1 Block OFF OFF
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Scroll.

Figure 4-37: All events screen

The screen legend options are:
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Scroll.

4-70 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key, the user returns to the previous screen (Metering screen)

Intro: Menu.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key, the user accesses the Events menu that offers the following options at the bottom of the
screen:
nextprevreloaddetailsAt

To access the different options in the snapshot events graphic menu the user must move the cursor from up to down or
from left to right. The selected option is displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected option, the
user must press again the enter/shuttle key.
<NEXT>
The user accesses the next available graphic screen (Events – New)
<PREV>
This option returns to the general events graphic menu (All Events)
<RELOAD>
This option updates all events stored in the relay and returns to the general events screen.
<DETAILS>
The Details screen provides access to metering values, and date and time related with the event.
The top of the screen displays a legend with the event text, followed by the date and time, the event status (ON or OFF),
and the event index number related to the complete list of events in the relay, for example (1/479). The rest of
information provided by the Details screen corresponds to the relay measures in the moment of the event. Metering
values provided in the events are secondary, and voltage values correspond to phase-to-ground voltage.

Ready LED ON
Date: 07/Nov/2004 St:ON
Time: 16:11:08.035 (1/479)

Phasor Ia Primary 0.000

Phasor Ib Primary 0.000
Phasor Ic Primary 0.000
Line Frequency 0.000
Phasor Ig Primary 0.000
Phasor Isg Primary 0.000
I0 Primary 0.000
I1 Primary 0.000

Enter: Meters. ESC: Prev : Scroll.

Figure 4-38: Snapshot events details screen

To navigate this screen the user must follow the legend at the bottom of the screen:

Enter: Meters. ESC: Prev. : Scroll.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-71

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Intro: Meters.
To access the metering values in the moment of the event, the user must press the enter/shuttle key. A new metering
screen is displayed, containing the primary metering values in the snapshot event, such as:

Phasor Ia Primary I2 Primary

Phasor Ib Primary Vab Primary
Phasor Ic Primary Vbc Primary
Line Frequency Primary Vca Primary
Phasor Ig Primary V1 Primary
Phasor Isg Primary V2 Primary
I0 Primary V0 Primary
I1 Primary 3 Phase Power Factor

Once inside the Metering screen, a new legend is shown for each event (Intro or ESC: Prev. U-D (L-R: Scroll); press ESC
or the shuttle key to return to the Event Details screen, and press the up-down key or rotate the shuttle key to access
all the metering values contained in the metering screen of the selected event.
ESC: Prev.
If the user presses the ESC key from the event detail screen, the system returns to the all events screen.

: Scroll.

Pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key left (L) or right (R) moves among all the events contained in the all
events screen, allowing a preview of the details for each of them.
<AT>
When this option is selected, the system marks the event where the cursor is located. A relative time stamp is
performed, in such a way that the selected event, marked with an asterisk (*) between the time and the event name is
set with a relative time of 00:00:00:000 on the top line of the event screen, together with its relative index, and the rest
of events in the screen shows a date/time that relates to the marked event. This operation mode allows a quick
inspection of the relative time passed between several events, which is very useful for analyzing events in the field.
The corresponding legend to this relative event-marking screen is as follows:
Esc: Out At.Enter: Tag event.
Esc: Out At.
The relative event marking is eliminated and the system returns to the general events screen.
Enter: Tag event.
If the user places the cursor on a different event by pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key left or
right, pressing the enter/shuttle key changes the relative mark to that new event.

4.2.7.4 New events screen

This screen shows the new events that have been produced in the relay since the last time the New Events screen was
read. The top of the screen shows a "New Events" legend, and the relative and total number of events contained.
Navigation through the different menus in this New Events screen is similar to the one described in the previous section for
All Events. The main difference is that in the case of new events it is necessary to select the RELOAD submenu to update
the screen with new events that have been produced, while in the All Events screen, this refreshment is automatic.
After the new events have been read, if the user selects again the Reload menu, the system shows a <No new events
available.> message, indicating that there are no more new events available since the last reading.

4-72 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

4.2.7.5 Alarms panel

Alarms panel can be viewed in all F650 models using communication software EnerVista 650 Setup, however, only models
with graphic display allow access to the alarms panel from the HMI.

First line shows the relative and total number of alarms existing in that screen. The relative number refers to the alarm on
which the cursor is located, and the total number refers to the total amount of alarms available. The second line on this
screen shows an index that indicates the number of the configured control event that corresponds to the displayed alarm,
followed by the alarm text configured in the Control Events menu inside the Relay Configuration option (Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Control Events).

Alarm Panel (1/3).

#1 OPERATIONS IN LOCAL MODE

7/11/04 16:54:16 OPERATIONS IN LO. ON

7/11/04 16:54:16 GENERAL PICKUP ON
7/11/04 16:54:16 GENERAL TRIP ON

Esc: Prev. Enter: Next

Figure 4-39: Alarms panel in HMI

The rest of the screen shows the different alarms produced in the relay with the date and time when the corresponding
event was produced, followed by the alarm identification text, and its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF).
In the previous example, the produced alarm is the change to local of the execution of operations (OPERATIONS IN LOCAL
MODE), the date and time when this event has been produced, and its status (ON):
The bottom of the screen shows the legend that indicates how to navigate through the different options available in the
screen.
ESC: Prev.Enter: Next.
ESC: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key, the system returns to the previous New Events screen.
Enter: Next.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key, the user accessed the available alarms menu, which includes the following options.
nextprevackack all
To access the different options provided by the alarms graphic menu, the user must press the up-down key or move the
shuttle key left to right. The selected option is displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected
option, the enter/shuttle key must be pressed.
<NEXT>
This option provides access to the next available graphic screen (I/O boards)
<PREV>
The system returns to the previous New Events screen.
<ACK>
This option acknowledges the alarm on which the cursor is located.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-73

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

<ACK ALL>
This option acknowledges all alarms. Alarm acknowledgment through the graphic HMI is considered as through
communication port COM2, as it is considered to be Local in both cases.
When an alarm has been acknowledged, a selection mark appears to the right of its status. Inactive alarms disappear
from the screen once they are acknowledged.

4.2.7.6 Input/output monitoring screen

This is the last screen available in the graphic display. This screen allows viewing the status of the relay inputs and outputs,
as well as emulate inputs (for verification of the logic, or related functions), and contact outputs (to verify wiring).
The format of this screen is shown on the figure below.
The first line shows the name of the screen "I/O Cards", followed by the type and description of the board where the cursor
is located, which appears between selection marks > < and blinking.

IO Card.
Type: 2, Nº IN 8, Nº OUT 8

>F<
G
H
J

Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card.

Figure 4-40: INPUTS/OUTPUTS GENERAL SCREEN

The navigation legend on this screen is as follows:

Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card

Esc: Prev.
This option returns to the previous screen (Alarms Panel).
Enter: Menu.
This option provides access to the selected I/O board menu:
This menu includes the following options.
nextviewtest inputtest output
As in previous screens, to access the different options provided by the inputs/outputs graphic menu, the user must press
the up-down key or move the shuttle key left to right. The selected option is displayed in upper case and between brackets.
To access the selected option, the enter/shuttle key must be pressed.

4-74 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

IO Card F. Type: 2, # IN 8, # OUT 8

Input (ON OFF) Output

0 CC1 8 Va COIL1
1 CC2 9 Vb COIL1
2 CC3 10 Va COIL2
3 CC4 11 Vb COIL2
4 CC5 12 Isense1
5 CC6 13 Isense1
6 CC7 14 SUP21
7 CC8 15 SUP22

next >VIEW< test input test output

Figure 4-41: Input/output viewing screen

<NEXT>
This option brings the system back to the one-line diagram.
<VIEW>
This option shows the real status of all inputs and outputs in the selected board. Depending on the type of board, with
or without supervision, the screen varies depending on the board characteristics.
The first line of this screen shows the slot where the board is located, F, G, H or J, and the type of board. The view
menu differentiates inputs and outputs; the active status (ON) is represented by the lighting of the corresponding input
or output.
The legend at the bottom of the screen indicates how to navigate:
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card

Esc: Prev.
Returns to the general I/O screen
Enter: Menu.
Provides access to the I/O menu (next, view, test input, test output).
: Chg Card
Pressing the up-down key or Moving the shuttle key to the left or right provides access to the status of inputs/
outputs for the different boards available in the relay.

<TEST INPUT>
This option allows testing the input activation (in emulation mode). The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but in this case the user can operate the different relay inputs.
This screen shows the Input name lit up, showing that this is an Input emulation mode.
The first relay input appears blinking and between brackets; the user can select a different input by pressing up-down
key or rotating the enter/shuttle key. When the shuttle key is pressed, the selected input is activated. Navigation
through this screen is indicated by the following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Enter: Chg Input.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-75

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

Esc: Exit Text.

The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
Enter: Chg Input.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key on the blinking input, this input is activated in emulation mode.
Note: input emulation can only be executed through the TEST INPUT tool on the graphic display.

<TEST OUTPUT>
This option allows testing the output activation in emulation mode. The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but in this case the user can operate the different relay contact outputs to test the wiring.
This screen shows the Output name lit up, showing that this is an output emulation mode.
The first relay output appears blinking and between brackets; the user can select a different output by pressing the
up-down key or rotating the shuttle key. When the enter/shuttle key is pressed, the selected output is activated.
Navigation through this screen is indicated by the following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Enter: Chg Output.
Esc: Exit Text.
The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
Enter: Chg Output.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key on the blinking output, this output is activated in emulation mode.
Note: Output emulation can be executed through the TEST OUTPUT tool on the graphic display, and also
through communications using EnerVista 650 Setup software for all F650 models.
: Chg Card
Pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key allows to change the selected I/O board in the main I/O screen.

4-76 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.3 WEB SERVER

4.3 Web server

4.3.1 Home
The web server in the F650 can be accessed running the Windows explorer, and typing http://xxx.xxx.xx.xxx, where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the relay IP address, which must be configured in Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings
> Ethernet.
The main screen of the F650 web server shows the different monitoring possibilities for snapshot events, events, alarms,
oscillography, fault reports, data logger and metering values provided by the relay through the web.
In order to access the different functions provided by the web server, the user must simply click the list name on the left
side of the screen.
The web server (for version 1.70 and higher ones) allows the user to visualize the different web server screen languages:
English, French, Spanish, Russian and Chinese by pressing the language button on the top right corner of the main window.
Take into account that this selection only changes the language in the web server screen, all the relay texts, such as
snapshot events, control events, etc. are in the language selected in the relay (see section 4.2.6.12 Select language in this
manual).

Figure 4-42: Web server main screen

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-77

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.3.2 Snapshot events

The Snapshot events screen shows all Snapshot events produced in the relay. This screen is refreshed automatically every
minute.
The information provided in this screen includes: first, the relative event index, the lowest index corresponding to the most
recent event; next, the event text that shows the reason for the event, its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF), and finally the
date and time when the event was produced.
The bottom of the screen shows a Metering screen; clicking on one of the events, the associated metering values are
shown on that screen.

Figure 4-43: Snapshot events screen

4-78 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.3 WEB SERVER

4.3.3 Control events

The control events screen provides access to all events that have been configured in the Control Events screen inside the
Relay Configuration menu of EnerVista 650 Setup.

Figure 4-44: Control events screen

Unlike the case of Snapshot events, in this screen the highest index corresponds to the most recent event. The information
provided is the control event index, the text that has been associated with the event when configured, its status, active
(ON) or inactive (OFF), and its date and time.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-79

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.3.4 Alarms
The alarms screen provides access to alarms configured in the relay. As in the case of snapshot events and control events,
this screen allows only to view the alarms, but not to acknowledge them.

Figure 4-45: Alarms screen

4-80 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.3 WEB SERVER

4.3.5 Oscillography
The oscillography screen allows obtaining from the relay available oscillography records in that moment.
This screen includes two windows. The first window shows oscillography records available in the relay, identified by an
index, being the highest index the most recent record (oscillography record No 6 in the example below).

Figure 4-46: Oscillography screen

If the user clicks on the oscillography record he wants to retrieve, the window on the right shows a description of the
record header, indicating its date, time, and the most relevant parameters of the record. Once a record is selected, it is
required to press the Download button. The system then opens a window to allow saving the files in Comtrade format on
the PC hard drive. Once the records have been saved, the system asks if the user wants to open GE-OSC tool (Comtrade
record viewer) to view the downloaded files.

Figure 4-47: GE-osc launch screen

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-81

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4.3.6 Fault report

The fault report screen provides access to the last 10 fault reports obtained by the relay. These records are stored
according to an index that marks their position among all records produced in the relay, with a range from 1 to 999,
returning to 1 in case of exceeding the limit of 999. As in the case of oscillography records, the highest index corresponds
to the most recent record.
In the fault report, oscillography and data logger screens, the system requests acceptance of a safety-warning message.

Figure 4-48: Fault report screen

The information provided in this screen includes the date and time when the fault was registered, fault calculations such
as distance to the fault, type of fault, date and time, and the line parameters, as well as the recloser and breaker status
during the fault.
This screen shows also pre-fault and fault voltage and current primary values. At the top of the screen, associated with the
trigger event number there is a button labeled as INFO. This button displays at the bottom of the screen the events
produced before and after the fault report trigger, so that the user has very useful information about the moment when
the fault was produced.
To obtain a text file with all the fault report information, press the Download option and save the file in the computer.

4-82 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.3 WEB SERVER

4.3.7 Data logger

The data logger screen allows viewing the data logger first and last value retrieval date and allows downloading the data record
files in Comtrade format, by pressing the Download option. Stored files can be viewed later using any Comtrade format viewer.

Figure 4-49: Data logger screen

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 4-83

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4-84 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

GE
Grid Solutions

F650 Digital Bay Controller

Chapter 5: Setpoints

SETPOINTS

5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Setpoint main menu
Table 5-1: Setpoint main menu in EnerVista 650 Setup software:
Product Setup
Communication settings
Serial Ports
Network (Ethernet)
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave (Available for standard and
IEC61850 models, not available for IEC 870-
5-103 models)
IEC 870-5-104 (Available for standard and
IEC61850 models, not available for IEC 870-
5-103 models)
SNTP
Procome (Available for Procome models
only)
IEC 870-5-103 (Available for IEC 870-5-103
models only)
PTP 1588 (Available from V7.00)
Routing (Available from V7.00)
ModBus User Map
Fault Report
Oscillography
Data Logger
Demand
Time Settings

System Setup
General settings

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-1

5.1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Flex Curves
Breaker
Breaker Settings
Breaker Maintenance
Switchgear
Miscellaneous Settings
Protection Elements
Phase Current
Phase TOC High
Phase TOC Low
Phase IOC High
Phase IOC Low
Phase Directional
Thermal Model
Neutral Current
Neutral TOC
Neutral IOC
Neutral Directional
Ground Current
Ground TOC
Ground IOC
Ground Directional
Sensitive Ground Current.
Sensitive Ground TOC
Sensitive Ground IOC
Isolated Ground IOC
Sensitive Ground Directional
Negative Sequence Current
Negative Sequence TOC
voltage Elements
Phase UV
Phase OV
Neutral OV High
Neutral OV Low
Negative Sequence OV
Auxiliary OV
Auxiliary UV
Power
Forward Power
Directional Power
Watt Gnd Flt High
Watt Gnd Flt Low
Control Elements
Setting Group
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure.
VT Fuse Failure.
Broken Conductor

5-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW

Locked Rotor
Pulse Counters
Analog Comparator
Frequency rate of change
Load Encroachment
Max. Number of Starts
Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup
Input/Outputs
Contact I/O
Board F
Board G
Board H
Board J
Force Outputs.
Remote Comms (Available for IEC61850
models only).
Virtual Inputs

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-3

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2 Product setup

5.2.1 Communication settings

5.2.1.1 Serial ports

Baud rate and parity for COM1 and COM2 serial communication ports.

Product Setup > Communication settings >Serial Ports

Name Default Value Step Range
COM1 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300: 115200]
COM2 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300: 115200]
COM1Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]
COM2Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]

5.2.1.2 Network (Ethernet)

Depending on the firmware version the Network (Ethernet) setting window vary.
For versions previous to 7.00 of firmware; the network Ethernet window settings are for configure Ethernet communication
parameters for ETH_1/ETH2 (Depending on model). Two different Ethernet addresses can be used, but the first IP always
has to be set as the second IP Address is an Alias. The ModBus Slave address used by Ethernet ports is the one set for
COM2.

Table 5-2: NETWORK settings for firmware versions previous to 7.00

Product Setup > Communication settings >Network (Ethernet) Network (Ethernet)1 > NETWORK
(ETHERNET)2
Name Default Value Step Range
IP Address Oct1 0 N/A [0: 255]
IP Address Oct2 0 N/A [0: 255]
IP Address Oct3 0 N/A [0: 255]
IP Address Oct4 0 N/A [0: 255]
Netmask Oct1 0 N/A [0: 255]
Netmask Oct2 0 N/A [0: 255]
Netmask Oct3 0 N/A [0: 255]
Netmask Oct4 0 N/A [0: 255]
Gateway IP Oct1 0 N/A [0: 255]
Gateway IP Oct2 0 N/A [0: 255]
Gateway IP Oct3 0 N/A [0: 255]
Gateway IP Oct4 0 N/A [0: 255]

For firmware versions 7.00 or higher; the Network settings are the Ethernet communication parameters for Port A, Port B
and Port E. Depending on the order code, up to three different Ethernet addresses can be used, The ModBus Slave address
used by Ethernet ports is the one set for COM2.

5-4 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Table 5-3: Network settings for firmware version 7.00 and above

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > NETWORK (ETHERNET) NETWORK (ETHERNET)A
> NETWORK (ETHERNET)B > NETWORK (ETHERNET) E > REDUNDANCY
Name Default Value Step Range User Value
IP Address Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IP Address Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IP Address Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IP Address Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]

IP ADDRESS: This setting sets the ports IPv4 address in standard IPV4 format. Note that this setting is only valid on port B if
port A’s REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.
NETMASK: This setting sets the ports IPv4 subnet mask in standard IPV4 format. Note that this setting is only valid on port
B if port A’s REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.

Table 5-4: Redundancy settings

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > NETWORK (ETHERNET) > REDUNDANCY
Name Default Value Step Range
REDUNDANCY MODE INDEPENDENT N/A [INDEPENDENT; LLA; PRP; HSR; RSTP;
DAISY_CHAIN]
LLA Priority DISABLED N/A [ENABLED; DISABLED]
LLA Timeout 5000 N/A [0 : 600000]
RSTP BRIDGE PRIORITY 32768 N/A [0 : 61440]
RSTP PORT A PRIORITY 128 N/A [0 : 240]
RSTP PORT A PATHCOST 200000 N/A [0 : 2000000]
RSTP PORT B PRIORITY 128 N/A [0 : 240]
RSTP PORT B PATHCOST 200000 N/A [0 : 2000000]

REDUNDANCY MODE: This setting is available only if the hardware has multiple ports. The setting determines if ports A and B
operate in redundant or independent mode. Different options are listed below:
-Independent: In non-redundant mode, port A and B operate independently with their own MAC, IP address, mask and
gateway.
NOTE: When using more than one Ethernet port, each port must be configured to belong to a different network, otherwise
communications becomes unpredictable.
NOTE 2: When non-redundant mode is selected, MAC address assigned to port A is the same as MAC address assigned to
port E but increased in one unit and MAC address assigned to port B is the same as MAC address assigned to port A but
increased in one unit.
E.g (MAC_portE: 00AFF40A24DA, MAC_portA:00AFF40A24DB, MAC_portB: 00AFF40A24DC)
-LLA (Link Loss) operation: The operation of ports A and B are as follows:
Ports A and B use port A’s MAC and IP address settings while port B is in standby mode in that it does not actively
communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-5

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

-PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and combine
information at the link layer. It is intended to only be used if the two ports are connected to separate parallel LAN’s. In
this mode of operation both ports cannot be connected to the same LAN. The receiving devices process the first frame
received and discard the duplicate through a link redundancy entity (LRE) or similar service that operates below layer
2. Aside from LRE, PRP uses conventional Ethernet hardware but both ports must know they are in PRP. Both ports of
PRP devices operate with the same Internet Protocol (IP) addresses for traffic that uses IP Management protocols such
as Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).
-HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and
combine information at the link layer. It is intended to work in a ring topology. In this mode of operation port A is
connected to the other device’s port B, and port B is connected to other device´s port A provided that ring topology is
respected. The receiving devices process the first frame received and discard the duplicate through a link redundancy
entity (LRE) or similar service that operates below layer 2. Aside from LRE, HSR uses conventional Ethernet hardware
but both ports must know they are in HSR. Both ports of HSR devices operate with the same Internet Protocol (IP)
addresses for traffic that uses IP Management protocols such as Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).
-RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and can operate
with different network topologies. The device operates only with one IP address through these 2 ports
-Daisy Chain: ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and operate by chaining one device with the
next one. Note that it is important not to create a loop in this topology. Both ends of the chain can be connected to
different networks. The device operates only with one IP address through these 2 ports.
NOTE 3: When LLA/PRP/HSR or PRR mode is selected, MAC addresses assigned to port A and B are the same between
them and a consecutive value of MAC address assigned to port E.
E.g (MAC_portE: 00AFF40A24DA, MAC_portA:00AFF40A24DB, MAC_portB: 00AFF40A24DB)
NOTE 4: When LLA/PRP/HSP/RSTP or DAISY CHAIN mode is selected, the IP configured at
Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network (Ethernet) > Network (Ethernet) A is the one used by both ports (A
and B) to communicate in these modes.

LLA PRIORITY: If this setting is set to enabled, the port A has the priority. If PORTA’s LLA detects a problem with the link,
communications is switched to Port B. Port B is, in effect, acting as a redundant or backup link to the network for port A.

LLA TIMEOUT: This setting is active only when the LLA PRIORITY is set to ENABLED. When the link on primary port is
detected again after it fails, there is LLA TIMEOUT (ms) monitoring time for the health of the network. During this time, the
secondary port remains active. If primary network is healthy for more than LLA TIMEOUT value, the switch over to primary
port is automatic.

RSTP BRIDGE PRIORITY: Specifies the switch (bridge) priority value. This value is used along with the switch MAC address to
determine which switch in the network is the root device. Lower values mean higher priority. The value ranges from 0 to
65535, with a default of 32768.

RSTP PORTA PRIORITY: This is to determine which ports are used for forwarding. Lower the number means higher priority.
Value ranges from 0 to 255. Default is 128.

RSTP PORTA PATHCOST: This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points.
Values range from 1 to 2000000. The lower the value, the lower the cost and hence the preferred route.

RSTP PORTB PRIORITY: This is to determine which ports are used for forwarding. Lower the number means higher priority.
Value ranges from 0 to 255. Default is 128.

RSTP PORTB PATHCOST: This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points.
Values range from 1 to 2000000. The lower the value, the lower the cost and hence the preferred route.

5-6 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

For this setting change to take effect, a reboot is required.

5.2.1.3 MODBUS protocol

ModBus Slave Addresses for serial and Ethernet communication and the ModBus port number used for ModBus TCP/IP. For
more detailed information go to appendix B in this manual.

Product Setup > Communication settings > ModBus Protocol

Name Default Value Step Range
ModBus Address COM1 254 1 [1 : 255]
ModBus Address COM2 254 1 [1 : 255]
ModBus Port Number 502 1 [0 : 65535]

5.2.1.4 DNP3 slave

Physical port, Slave Address for DNP, IP Addresses for Masters, TCP/UDP Port, Unsolicited Response parameters, Analog
scale factors and deadbands, message fragment size, Binary input block. For more detailed information go to appendix C
in this manual. DNP protocol is available for standard and IEC61850 models but it is not available Procome models.
Table 5-5: DNP protocol settings
Product Setup > Communication settings >DNP3 Slave
DNP3 Slave 1 > DNP3 Slave 2 > DNP3 Slave 3
Name Default Value Step Range
Physical Port NONE N/A [COM1:COM2:NETWORK]
Address 255 1 [0 : 65534]
IP Addr Client1 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client1 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client1 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client1 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client2 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client2 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client2 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client2 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client3 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client3 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client3 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client3 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client4 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client4 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client4 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client4 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client5 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client5 Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client5 Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
IP Addr Client5 Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
TCP/UDP Port 20000 1 [0 : 65535]
Unsol Resp Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Unsol Resp TimeOut 5 1 [0 : 60]
Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 1 [0 : 255]
Unsol Resp Dest Adr 200 1 [0 : 65535]
Current Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-7

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Product Setup > Communication settings > DNP3 Slave

DNP3 Slave 1 > DNP3 Slave 2 > DNP3 Slave 3
Voltage Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Power Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Energy Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
PF Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Other Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000]
Current Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Voltage Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Power Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Energy Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
PF Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 32767]
Other Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Msg Fragment Size 240 1 [30 : 2048]
Binary Input Block 1 CTL EVENTS 1-16 N/A
Binary Input Block 2 CTL EVENTS 17-32 N/A
Binary Input Block 3 CTL EVENTS 33-48 N/A
Binary Input Block 4 CTL EVENTS 49-64 N/A
Binary Input Block 5 CTL EVENTS 65-80 N/A
Binary Input Block 6 CTL EVENTS 81-96 N/A
Binary Input Block 7 CTL EVENTS 97-112 N/A
Binary Input Block 8 CTL EVENTS 113-128 N/A
Binary Input Block 9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8 N/A
Binary Input Block 10 SWITCHGEAR 9-16 N/A
Default Analog Map ENABLED N/A
Analog Input Point 0 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 1 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 2 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 3 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 4 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 5 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 6 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 7 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 8 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 9 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 10 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 11 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 12 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 13 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 14 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 15 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 16 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 17 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 18 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 19 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 20 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 21 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 22 End of list N/A

5-8 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Analog Input Point 23 End of list N/A

Analog Input Point 24 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 25 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 26 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 27 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 28 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 29 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 30 End of list N/A
Analog Input Point 31 End of list N/A

5.2.1.5 IEC 60870-5-104

Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. For more detailed information go to appendix D in this manual. DNP
protocol is available for standard and IEC61850 models but it is not available Procome models.

Table 5-6: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol settings

Product Setup > Communication settings >IEC 870-5-104
Name Default Value Step Range
Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED-ENABLED]
TCP Port 2404 1 [1 : 65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 255 1 [0 : 65535]
Cyclic Meter Period 0 1 [0 : 3600]
Synchronization Event 0 1 [0 : 3600]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Function 2 DISABLED N/A
TCP Port 2 2404 N/A [0 : 65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 2 255 N/A [0 : 65535]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IEC104 SCALE CURRENT 1 [0,00001; 0,0001; 0,001; 0,01; 0,1; 1; 10;
100; 1000; 10000]
IEC104 SCALE VOLTAGE 1
IEC104 SCALE POWER 1 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 SCALE ENERGY 1 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 SCALE OTHER 1 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND CURRENT 30000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND VOLTAGE 30000 [0 : 65535]

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-9

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

IEC104 DEADBAND POWER 30000 [0 : 65535]

IEC104 DEADBAND ENERGY 30000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND OTHER 30000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA BINARIES 1000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA DOUBLE POINTS 1500 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA ANALOGS 2000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA COUNTERS 4000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA COMMANDS 3000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA ANALOG PARAMETERS 5000 [0 : 65535]

5.2.1.6 SNTP

Product Setup > Communication settings > SNTP > SNTP1/SNTP2

Name Default Value Step Range
Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
UDP Port 123 1 [1 : 65535]
Server Ip Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]

The F650 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the F650 can obtain the clock time
over an Ethernet network. The F650 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a
dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Three different modes of SNTP operation are
supported. These modes are unicast, broadcast and anycast.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as an IRIG-B source is connected to the F650, the IRIG-B signal provides
the time value to the F650 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained
from the SNTP server is used.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, Server IP Oct1...4 must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set
and the Function setting is “UNICAST”, the F650 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes forty seconds until the F650 clock is synchronized with the SNTP/NTP
server. It may take up to one minute for the F650 to signal an SNTP FAIL state if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the Function setting to “BROADCAST”. The F650 then listens to SNTP messages sent to
the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The F650 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving
an SNTP broadcast message before signalling an SNTP FAIL state.
To use SNTP in anycast mode, set the Function setting to “ANYCAST”. Anycast mode is designed for use with a set of
cooperating servers whose addresses are not known beforehand by the client. The F650 sends a request to a multicast
group address assigned by IANA for NTP protocol. This address is 224.0.1.1 and a group of SNTP/NTP servers listens to it.
Upon receiving a request each server sends a unicast response to the SNTP/NTP client. The F650 relay binds to the first
unicast message received from any server. Then it continues operating with SNTP/NTP server in unicast mode. Any further
responses from other SNTP/NTP servers are ignored. In unicast mode of operation the chosen time server can go offline, in
that case it takes about one minute for the F650 to signal an SNTP FAIL state and to switch again to anycast mode to try to
find another time server. In anycast mode the F650 tries to send multicast messages up to five minutes before signalling
an SNTP FAIL state.
The F650 relay does not support the multicast mode of SNTP functionality.
For firmware version 7.20 or above, F650 shall accept time synchronization from up to two different SNTP servers. In order
to define number of SNTP servers to be used, different settings for each SNTP server must be configured in the F650. SNTP1
or/and SNTP2 tab settings shall be configured.
If only one SNTP server is used to synchronize the relay, SNTP1 tab settings shall be filled with its corresponding settings. If
two SNTP servers are used, SNTP1 and SNTP2 tab shall be filled as follow:

5-10 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

"SNTP1 tab shall contain settings of main SNTP server.

"SNTP2 tab shall contain settings of back-up SNTP server.
If two SNTP servers are configured, F650 operation mode is described as follows:

Scenario Expected behaviour

SNTP1 server= Available F650 shall be synchronized by SNTP1 server.
SNTP2 server= Available No alarm
SNTP1 server= Available F650 shall continue to be synchronized by SNTP1 server
SNTP2 server= Not Available No alarm
SNTP1 server= Not Available If SNTP1 server fails, F650 shall get synchronization from SNTP2
SNTP2 server= Available server. When SNTP1 server recovers, F650 shall switch to be
synchronized by SNTP1 server.
No alarm
SNTP1 server= Not Available "Not Syncronized" Alarm shall appear in local mimic
SNTP2 server= Not Available

NOTE: SNTP settings take effect after rebooting the device.

5.2.1.7 Procome protocol settings

Communication settings for Procome protocol. For more detail information go to APPENDIX E in this manual.

Product Setup > Communication settings > PROCOME

Name Default Value Step Range
COMM Port NONE N/A [NONE - COM1]
Slave Number 0 1 [0 : 254]

When NONE is selected in the comm port setting the protocol is not enabled. The com1 selection enables Procome for the
com1 (remote) serial port.
Slave Number:is the Procome slave number.
Baud rate and parity for COM1 must be set in the Setpoint > Communications > Serial Ports menu.

5.2.1.8 IEC 870-5-103 protocol settings

Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. For more detailed information go to 5.13 Section in this manual.

Product Setup > Communication settings > IEC 870-5-103

Name Default Value Step Range
COMM Port NONE N/A [NONE - COM1]
Slave Number 1 1 [0 : 254]
Synchronization Timeout 30 min 1 [0 : 1440]

DNP protocol is available for standard and IEC61850 models but it is not available IEC 60870-5-103 models.

If COMM Port is set to NONE, IEC 870-5-103 communication protocol is not available.

If the user sets a value different from 0 in the Synchronization Timeout setting, when this timer expires without receiving a
synchronization message, the Invalid bit is set in the time stamp of a time-tagged message.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-11

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2.1.9 PTP IEEE 1588 protocol settings

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > PTP 1588

Name Default Value Step
PTP FUNCTION DISABLE [DISABLE; ENABLE]
PORTA DELAY ADDER 0 ns [0 : 60000]
PORTA DELAY ASYM 0 ns [-1000 : 1000]
PORTB DELAY ADDER 0 ns [0 : 60000]
PORTB DELAY ASYM 0 ns [-1000 : 1000]
STRICT POWER PROFILE DISABLED DISABLED/ENABLED
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER 0 [0 : 255]
PTP VLAN PRIORITY 4 [0 : 7]
PTP VLAN ID 0 [0 : 4095]
PTP EPOCH UTC SINCE 2000 UTC SINCE 2000; UTC SINCE 1970; UTC SINCE 1900

F650 relay supports IEEE 1588 version 2.

The relay meets the time accuracy requirements of IEC 61850-5-Ed2 clause 11.1.3.3 time synchronization class T5 (± 1 µs)
and of the IEEE Std. PC37.118.1 Draft 1.6 clause 4.3 (± 1 µs), given an error-free PP input and stable temperature
The relay resynchronizes to a grandmaster slewing at ±2 µs/s when the rate of change of frequency stabilizes. It may
become unsynchronized when the ramp starts or stops.
The relay only supports Peer-To-Peer delay mechanism.

PTP FUNCTION
While this port setting is selected to disabled, PTP is disabled on this port. The relay does not generate or listen to PTP
messages on this port.

PORT A, B PATH DELAY ADDER

The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in this setting prior to the time being used to synchronize the
relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays not compensated for in the
network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms compensate for all the
delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, this setting should be zero.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not all
delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the message. This
setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the relay is not aware of network switching
that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that is always completely correct for
uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen to reduce the worst-case error to half of the range between minimum and
maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are known.

PORT A, B PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY

Range: -1 000 … +1 000 ns
Default: 0
This setting corresponds to “delayAsymmetry” in PTP, which is used by the peer delay mechanism to compensate for any
difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in unusual cases, the two fibers are of
essentially identical length and composition, so this setting should be set to zero.
In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions, this setting should be set to the number of
nanoseconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from
the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that
the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9 000 ns and the that the delay from the switch to the
relay is 11 000 ns, then the mean delay is 10 000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is +1 000 ns.

5-12 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

STRICT POWER PROFILE

Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238™-2011) requires that the relay only select as a grandmaster power profile compliant
clocks, that the delivered time have worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be implemented. With
the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay only selects master clocks displaying the IEEE_C37_238 identification
codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power profile setting disabled, the
relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks are present, and uses ports even if
the peer delay mechanism is non-operational.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER

This setting should be set to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to be synchronized to. A network
may support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. More commonly, there
is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

PTP VLAN PRIORITY

This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s peer
delay mechanism. In compliance with PP the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is recommended that in accordance with PTP
it be set to 7.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN Priority may have no effect.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

PTP VLAN ID
This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s peer delay
mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP. As these messages have a destination address that indicates they are not
to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so may be left at its default value.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN ID may have no effect.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.

PTP EPOCH
This setting sets the reference point from which time is measured.

NOTE: PTP settings take effect after rebooting the device.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-13

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2.1.10 Routing
A default route and a maximum number of 6 static routes may be configured. The default route is used as the last choice,
if no other route towards a given destination is found.

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > ROUTING

Name Default Value Step
Default RT GWY Oct1 10 [0 : 255]
Default RT GWY Oct2 3 [0 : 255]
Default RT GWY Oct3 32 [0 : 255]
Default RT GWY Oct4 1 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT2 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT3 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]

5-14 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > ROUTING

Name Default Value Step
Static RT3 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT4 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT5 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 IP Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 IP Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 IP Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 Mask Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 Mask Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 Mask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 GWY Oct2 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 GWY Oct3 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT6 GWY Oct4 0 [0 : 255]

The redundancy communications comes with the capability of setting a number of static routes and one default route, which
is used instead of default gateway.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-15

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Default RT GWY:
This setting sets the gateway of the default route to be used by IP traffic sent from the relay, if no other route towards a
given IP destination is found.

Note that this setting is only valid on port B if port REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.

Static RTX IP: This setting sets the destination IPv4 route.
Static RTX MASK: This setting sets the IP mask associated with the route.
Static RTX GWY: This setting sets the gateway to reach the destination IP route.

Important Notes:
1. Host routes are not supported at present.
2. The route mask has IPv4 mask format. In binary this should be a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed
by one or more contiguous bits of 0.
3. The route destination and mask must match.
•This can be verified by checking that RtDestination & RtMask == RtDestination
•Example of good configuration: RtDestination= 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
•Example of bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
4) The route destination must not be a connected network.
5) The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as
well.

5.2.2 MODBUS user map settings

The ModBus user map definition. 256 records, selectable from the complete relay ModBus map, from the ModBus user
map. For more detailed information go to appendix B in this manual.

Product Setup > ModBus User Map

Name Default Value Step Range
Address 00 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
Address 01 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
... ...
Address 254 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
Address 255 0000 [0000 : FFFF]

5-16 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.2.3 Fault report settings

The fault report module defines the type of fault (three-phase, phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground), and the distance to the
fault. The fault activation signal (FAULT REPORT TRIGG) is programmed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements.
The fault report provides fault date, fault type and fault location information.
Information referred to the last ten faults is stored as fault report and available to the user through the EnerVista 650 Setup
software or the web server application. Each fault report includes the following information:
• Fault date and time
• Pre-fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault current and voltages in primary values
• Fault type
• Distance to the fault (fault location)
• Line parameters
• Recloser and breaker status information
As an option, the Relay offers the possibility to display a fault-warning message on the relay HMI (selectable by setting).

5.2.3.1 Fault report settings

Setpoint > Product Setup > Fault Report

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Positive sequence impedance module Pos Seq Module 3.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 250.00]
Positive sequence impedance angle Pos Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Zero sequence impedance module Zero Seq Module 9.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 750.00]
Zero sequence impedance angle Zero Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Line length Line Length 100.0 0.1 [0.0 : 2000.0]
Display fault on HMI Show Fault On HMI DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
CT Direction CT Direction REVERSE N/A REVERSE-FORWARD
CT Connections CT Connections CTA+CTB+CTC N/A [CTA+CTB+CTC-CTA+CTB-
CTA+CTC-CTB+CTC]

Function permission (Function): Enabling this setting allows to create a fault report
when the FAULT REPORT TRIGG is activated.
Positive sequence impedance module (Pos Seq Module): Value, in ohms, of the line positive sequence
impedance module.
Positive sequence impedance Angle (Pos Seq Angle): Value, in degrees, of the line positive sequence angle.
Zero sequence impedance module (Zero Seq Module): Value, in ohms, of the line zero sequence impedance
module.
Zero sequence impedance Angle (Zero Seq Angle): Value, in degrees, of the line zero sequence angle.
Line Length: The metering element can be kilometers or miles.
Show Fault On HMI: This setting enables or disables the option to display
faults on the Relay HMI.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event
generation for the fault report element.
CT Direction: Direction of the phase current transformers.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-17

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Forward: The polarity of he current transformers is as

the F650 wiring diagram.
Reverse: The polarity of the current transformers is
inverted. Voltage and current are 180º out of phase.
CT Connections: This setting allows fault locator function to work with
different CTs configurations. Based on this selection,
fault locator function can work with two different
configurations:
-With three phase current inputs measured through
phase CT inputs
-With two phase current inputs and ground current
inputs measured through corresponding CT inputs.
Third phase current inputs is calculated using
measured values of current inputs previously
described.
Settings available:
CTA+CTB+CTC- All three currents used during fault
location are the ones that are measured directly from
Ia, Ib, Ic current inputs.
CTA+CTB- Ia and Ib used by fault locator are the ones
measured and Ic is calculated based on Ia, Ib and Ig.
CTA+CTC- Ia and Ic used by fault locator are the ones
measured and Ib is calculated based on Ia, Ic and Ig.
CTB+CTC- Ib and Ic used by fault locator are the ones
measured and Ib is calculated based on Ia, Ic and Ig.

WARNING
If only two phase CTs are connected to the relay, several protection elements are affected and could experience
unexpected behaviors. Also several measurements are affected and accuracy will not be met.
Proper behavior of all protection elements and measurements accuracy cannot be guaranteed if any of these
settings is selected: CTA+CTB, CTA+CTC, CTB+CTC.

States associated with the fault report (Actual > Status > fRecords Status > Fault Reports), are shown on Table 5-7: Fault
report states
Table 5-7: Fault report states
FAULT REPORT STATES
FAULT REPORT TRIGG
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS
FAULT DATE
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT REPORT NUMBER

FAULT REPORT TRIGG: The activation of this state initiates the calculation of the fault location and the generation
of the corresponding report.

5-18 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: The activation of this state produces the removal of all faults stored in the relay.
Additionally, all active faults on the HMI display are acknowledged. This signal is
programmed at “Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements”.
FAULT DATE: Date and time of the last fault.
FAULT TYPE: Type of the last fault produced (3PHASE, AG, BG, CG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, NAF). NAF
indicates that the type of fault has not been calculated.
FAULT LOCATION: Calculated distance to the last fault (the metering element is the same used for setting the
line length).
FAULT REPORT NUMBER: Number of the fault report file saved in the relay’s non-volatile memory, associated with
the last fault produced.

5.2.3.2 Fault report retrieval

Fault report files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at "http:\\relay IP address".
To obtain fault reports using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, go to Actual > Records > Fault report. The top of the
window shows the number of the last fault report stored by the device (Fault Record Number). Click View header to see the
header of the record selected under Select Record.
Click Download to retrieve the file and save in a selected folder. The file name is “FLTxxx.TXT”, where xxx is the
corresponding record number.
• For firmware versions below 7.XX, oscillography record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp)
communication ports.
• For firmware versions below 7.70, oscillography record retrieval uses Ethernet communications ports (ftp, tftp).
• For firmware versions 7.70 and above, oscillography record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp)
communication ports.
Fault reports are stored in the relay’s non-volatile memory, so they are accessible from the EnerVista 650 Setup software
or the relay’s web server. The fault report is a text file named FLTxxx.txt where xxx is the record number, with a range of
001 to 999. Only files from the 10 last faults are stored. If there are already ten files stored and a new fault occurs, the new
fault overwrites the oldest one. If Show Fault on HMI is enabled, real-time fault information is also displayed on the HMI.
When a fault is produced and a warning message is displayed on the HMI, fault information alternates between two
separate screens: one with general information, and a second with the fault metering values. This screen needs to be
acknowledged by the user to exit the fault report screen. If several consecutive faults are produced, the HMI displays the
most recent one. Each stored fault needs to be acknowledged (up to a maximum of 10 faults). The HMI menu offers an
option to view the last 10 faults produced, with both the general information screen and the metering screen available for
each fault.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-19

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2.4 Oscillography settings

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
This trigger can be configured with a programmable logic operand.
Oscillography records are stored in COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999 standard format.
The oscillography module is in charge of storing the instantaneous values of the 9 analog signals and the 16
programmable digital signals at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Oscillography in fault conditions (OSCILLO TRIGGER
signal activation).
All oscillography records store all analog signals (fixed) plus 16 digital signals (programmable). The order of storage in the
case of analog signals is as follows:
Analog 1 IA channel.
Analog 2 IB channel.
Analog 3 IC channel.
Analog 4 IG channel.
Analog 5 ISG channel.
Analog 6 VA or VAB channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta, at “Setpoint > System Setup >
General Settings > Serial VT Connection”).
Analog 7 VB or VBC channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta, at “Setpoint > System Setup >
General settings > Phase VT Connection”).
Analog 8 VC or VCA channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta, at “Setpoint > System Setup >
General settings > Phase VT Connection”).
Analog 9 VN or VX channel, depending on the selected configuration (zero sequence measured, or busbar voltage, at
“Setpoint > System Setup > General settings > Auxiliary Voltage”).

The 16 digital channels and the oscillography trigger signal are programmable using the EnerVista 650 Setup software at
Setpoint > Relay configuration > Oscillography. Each digital channel can be associated with a single status or to a logic
status. In this last case, the logic must be configured using the PLC Editor tool, at Setpoint > Logic Configuration inside
EnerVista 650 Setup. The oscillography trigger signal can be a single status or a configured logic. The relay’s default
configuration associates the oscillography trigger to Virtual Output 83, which corresponds to the logic associated with the
general trip of protection elements.

5.2.4.1 Oscillography settings

Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function Permission Function ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Prefault Trigger Position 30 1% [5 : 95]
Samples per cycle Samples/Cycle 64 N/A [4 – 8 – 16 –32 – 64]
Maximum number of oscillos Max. Number Osc. 4 1 oscillo [1 : 20]
Automatic oscillography overwrite Automatic Overwrite DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

Function Permission (Function): Enabling this setting allows to create an oscillography record when the “TRIGGER
OSCILLO” signal is activated.
Trigger Position: This setting defines the prefault data (in percentage) stored every time a new oscillo is
produced.
Samples/Cycle: This setting defines the number of samples per cycle stored in each oscillography
record.

5-20 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Maximum Number of Oscillos (Max. Number Osc.):

1 to 20 oscillography records can be selected.
Automatic Overwrite: This setting allows chained oscillographies during the fault (TRIGGER OSCILLO signal
activated). The oscillography module is reset once the data has been completely
stored in Flash memory and the TRIGGER OSCILLO state is deactivated.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables snapshot event generation for the oscillography
element.
Oscillography files calculations

The overall maximum samples capacity is allocated for 27594 samples. The size of each oscillography file depends on the
configured number of oscillographies and is evenly distributed based on the maximum samples value using these
formulas:

Number of samples per oscillography = (27594 samples)/(Max. Number Osc. setpoint)

Number of cycles per oscillography = (Number of samples per oscillography)/(Samples / Cycle setpoint).

After a change in oscillography settings all oscillography files stored on the flash memory are erased.
NOTICE
EXAMPLE

For a Max. Number Osc. of 4, each record stores 27594 / 4 = 6898 samples per stored oscillo.

If we set the Samples /Cycle setpoint to 64 samples per cycle, each record stores up to 6898 / 64 = 107.78 signal cycles.
This value expressed in terms of time is:
For 50 Hz: 204.79 cycles x 20 ms/cycle = 4095.8 ms.
For 60 Hz: 204.79 cycles x 16.67 ms/cycle = 3413 ms.

5.2.4.2 Oscillography states

OSCILLOGRAPHY STATES
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
OSC DIG CHANNEL 5
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
OSC DIG CHANNEL 8
OSC DIG CHANNEL 9
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
OSCILLO TRIGGER
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS
CYCLES PER RECORD
AVAILABLE RECORDS

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-21

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

OSC DIGITAL CHANNEL XX: These states are configured at “Setpoint > Relay configuration > Oscillography”.
Each of these states can be associated with a protection state or to a virtual output.
Each oscillography record reflects the changes experienced by this state during the
record.
OSCILLO TRIGGER: The activation of this state produces the oscillography record capture. Each record
uses a percentage of its capacity to store prefault information. This percentage is
selected in the Trigger Position setting, and the rest of the record’s capacity stores
post-fault information.
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: This is the number of the most recent oscillography record stored in the relay. The
record is stored in COMTRADE format. The range is 0 to 999.
CYCLES PER RECORD: This state displays the number of cycles that are stored in each oscillography record.
Although the number of cycles can be a decimal number, the record represents only
the integer part.
AVAILABLE RECORDS: The range is 0 to 20.

5.2.4.3 Oscillography file retrieval

Oscillography files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
To obtain the oscillography records using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, go to “Actual > Records > Waveform
capture”. The top of the window shows the number of the last oscillography record stored by the device (Newest Record
Number), followed by the maximum number of oscillos available (Available Records in Device). Click View header to show
the header of the record selected at Select Record.
Click Download and the three files (*.DAT, *.HDR, *.CFG) that form the oscillography record in the COMTRADE standard are
retrieved and viewed automatically if the GE-OSC software is installed in the computer. Retrieved oscillography records
can be viewed using any Comtrade viewer. The EnerVista 650 Setup software stores oscillography records in the folder
“.\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc” by default, in the same directory where the program is installed. The file names are
“OSCxxx.DAT”, “OSCxxx.CFG”, “OSCxxx.HDR”, where xxx is the corresponding record number.
• For firmware versions below 7.XX, oscillography record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp)
communication ports.
• For firmware versions above 7.00 and below 7.70, oscillography record retrieval uses Ethernet communications ports
(tftp).
• For firmware versions 7.70 and above, oscillography record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (tftp)
communication ports.

5.2.5 Data logger settings

The F650 data logger can store information from up to 16 analog channels, among all channels available in the relay, with
a selectable sampling rate. The memory of the data logger is fixed at 64 Kilobytes with two bytes needed per channel. The
selected channels take all available memory space, therefore, the number of days of storage depends on the selected
number of channels and sampling rate.

5.2.5.1 Data logger SETTINGS

Setpoint > Product Setup > Data Logger

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Data logger Rate Data Logger Rate 1s N/A [1 s, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 60 min.]
Data Logger analog channels X Data Logger Chnl X None N/A [1 to 16]

Function permission (Function): This must be enabled to start storing information.

5-22 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Data Logger Rate: the data logger can be configured in rates of 1 second, and 5, 10, 15,
20, 30 and 60 minutes
Data Logger Analog Channel X (Data Logger Chnl X): Analog Channels programmable in the data logger. The X value has
a range from 0 to 16.
Any setting change in the Data Logger erases all stored information.

5.2.5.2 Data logger associated states

States associated with the data logger module (“Actual > Status > Records Status > Data logger) are shown on the table
below:

DATA LOGGER STATES

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS
DATA LOGGER DAYS

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: The Date/time of the oldest state with 6 characters. This is the time that corresponds
to the oldest sample. This value remains constant until the available memory capacity
is exceeded. Afterwards, this value changes according to the sampling rate (Data
Logger Rate).
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: The Date/time of the newest state with 6 characters. This is the time when the most
recent sample was taken. This value is updated according to the sample rate selected.
If no channel has been selected, these settings do not change.
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS: This state shows the number of channels selected.
DATA LOGGER DAYS: This state shows the number of days that can be stored. It depends on the Data
Logger Rate setting, and on the number of channels selected.

5.2.5.3 Data logger file format and retrieval

File Retrieval
Data logger files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
For obtaining the data logger files using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user must access “Actual > Records > Data
Logger”. The top of the window shows the date when the oldest sample was taken, and then the date when the newest
sample was taken.
This screen shows the measurements stored for the different channels through the time.
Clicking on the “Download” button, all the information contained in the file can be read.
Clicking on the “Save” button, the data logger files (*.DAT, *.CFG) are retrieved in COMTRADE format, and saved by default in
the folder “...\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc”, using “DLGxxx.DAT”, “DLGxxx.CFG” names, where xxx is the corresponding
record number.
For firmware versions below 7.70, datalogger record retrieval uses Ethernet communications ports (ftp, tftp). For firmware
versions 7.70 or above, datalogger record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp) communication ports
File Format
Data logger information is made of two text files: configuration file (datalogger.cfg), and data file (datalogger.dat).

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-23

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2.6 Demand settings

5.2.6.1 Metering values and settings

The demand calculation is made according to the following primary parameters:

Table 5-8: Primary demand values

PRIMARY DEMAND VALUES STEP
IA (RMS) KA
IB (RMS) KA
IC (RMS) KA
IG (RMS) KA
ISG (RMS) KA
I2 KA
Three phase active power (W) MW
Three phase reactive power (VAR) MVAr
Apparent power (VA) MVA

*Note: The step depends on the selected “Primary Meter Units” in System Setup > General Settings (A_V; KA_KV)
Different integration methods can be selected to calculate current and power values.
Calculated demand values are as follows:
Table 5-9: Demand calculated values
DEMAND CALCULATED VALUES
DEMAND IA DEMAND IG DEMAND W
DEMAND IA MAX DEMAND IG MAX DEMAND W MAX
DEMAND IA DATE DEMAND IG DATE DEMAND W DATE
DEMAND IB DEMAND ISG DEMAND VAR PWR
DEMAND IB MAX DEMAND ISG MAX DEMAND VAR MAX
DEMAND IB DATE DEMAND ISG DATE DEMAND VAR DATE
DEMAND IC DEMAND I2 DEMAND VA PWR
DEMAND IC MAX DEMAND I2 MAX DEMAND VA MAX
DEMAND IC DATE DEMAND I2 DATE DEMAND VA DATE
DEMAND W MIN DEMAND VAR MIN DEMAND VA MIN

The relay measures current demanded on each phase, ground and sensitive ground, negative sequence and three-phase
demand for real, reactive and apparent power. Current and Power methods can be chosen separately. Settings are
provided to disable certain measuring techniques. These techniques are used by many utilities for statistical or control
purposes.

5-24 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Demand module settings are as follows:

Table 5-10: Demand settings
Setpoint > Product Setup > Demand
Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Demand Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Demand method for current CRNT Demand Method THERMAL EXPONENTIAL N/A [BLOCK INTERVAL -
values ROLLING DEMAND -
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL]
Demand method for Power values POWER Demand Method THERMAL EXPONENTIAL N/A [BLOCK INTERVAL -
ROLLING DEMAND -
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL]
Demand interval Demand Interval 5 Minutes N/A [5 – 10 – 15 – 20– 30–60]
Trigger Enabled Trigger Enabled DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

Function permission (Function): This setting enables the demand function.

Demand Method for Current values (CRNT Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for current
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling
Demand.
Demand Method for Power values (POWER Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for power
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling
Demand.
Demand Interval: Integration interval. Available intervals are 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes.
Measurement integration is performed in the period adjusted in the Demand Interval
setting.
Demand Trigger: Operation mode selection for the Block Interval calculation method. This operation
mode depends on the “Trigger Enabled” setting. If trigger enabled is set as disabled,
measurement integration is made in the Demand Interval period. If trigger enabled is
enabled, measurement integration is made during the time interval between two
consecutive pulses of the input assigned as DEMAND TRIGGER INP,. This input is set
at Setpoint > Relay configuration > Protection Elements
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the demand
element.

5.2.6.2 Demand calculation methods

Calculation Method 1: Thermal Exponential

This method simulates the action of an analog peak recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the magnitude
for each phase (or three-phase, depending on the case) every second, and it assumes that the magnitude remains the
same until the next update. It calculates the equivalent thermal demand using the following equation:

d (t ) =D(1 − e−Kt )
Where:
D Input signal (constant).
d(t) Demand value after applying the input value during time t (in minutes)
K 2.3 / thermal 90% response time

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-25

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Illustrated bellow is the curve with a 90% characteristic time of 15 minutes. A setting establishes the time to reach 90% of
a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady-state valve applied for twice the
response time indicates 99% of the value.

Calculation Method 2: Rolling Demand.

This method calculates the linear average of the quantity over the set demand time interval. The calculation is made every
second. The value is updated every minute and indicates the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of
update.

Calculation Method 3: Block Interval

The Block Interval operation mode depends on the “Trigger Enabled” setting.

Calculation Method 3a: Block Interval – With trigger setting DISABLED.

This method consists on integrating the measurements during the time period specified in the DEMAND INTERVAL
setting. The calculation is made every second and the demand value is the average of all values produced during the
time interval. The time interval is chosen in the DEMAND INTERVAL setting. The interval demand value is shown once
this time has expired.
If, for example, the setting indicates 15 minutes for integration, the demand value update is made every 15 minutes
(although the calculation is made every second). This method calculates a linear average of the magnitude.

Calculation Method 3b: Block Interval – With trigger setting ENABLED.

The demand value is given by integration of the measurement during the time between two consecutive pulses in the
input assigned. The input is assigned to DEMAND TRIGGER in Relay Configuration. The integration is made every
second with each new measure.
In case the interval between two consecutive pulses exceeds 60 minutes, the relay calculates the demand after 60
minutes from the last pulse, this measure is updated in the status and a new demand count starts. This method
calculates a linear average of the magnitude.

5-26 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Figure 5-1: Response to different demand methods shows the behavior of the demand, depending on the Selected setting
for demand calculation.

1,2

0,8

0,6

Input
0,4

0,2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)

1,2

0,8
Demand %

0,6

0,4

0,2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)

1,2

0,8
Demand %

0,6

0,4

0,2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)
Block interval

1,2

0,8
Demand %

0,6

0,4

0,2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 3
-0,2
Time (minutes)
Rolling demand

Figure 5-1: Response to different demand methods

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-27

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.2.6.3 Demand function measurements and states

Demand values are available at Actual > Metering > Primary Values > Demand.
Table 5-11: Demand measurements
Name Default Value Step
DEMAND IA 0.000 KA
DEMAND IA MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IA DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IB 0.000 KA
DEMAND IB MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IB DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IC 0.000 KA
DEMAND IC MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IC DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IG 0.000 KA
DEMAND IG MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IG DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND ISG 0.000 KA
DEMAND ISG MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND ISG DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND I2 0.000 KA
DEMAND I2 MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND I2 DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND W 0.000 MW
DEMAND W MAX 0.000 MW
DEMAND W MIN 0.000 MW
DEMAND W DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND VAR PWR 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR MAX 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR MIN 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND VA PWR 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA MAX 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA MIN 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000

*Note: The step depends on the selected “Primary Meter Units” in System Setup > General Settings (A_V; KA_KV)

Demand measurements for current values are as follows:

DEMAND IX This is the demanded value every minute or every integration period, depending on the
selected settings.
DEMAND IX MAX Demanded maximeter; it stores the Maximum demand value until a demand reset is
issued.
DEMAND IX DATE Date of the Maximum demand value
Being X the phase considered in each case.

Demand measurements for power values are as follows (Y being the power considered in each case):
DEMAND Y This is the demanded value every minute or every integration period, depending on the
selected settings

5-28 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

DEMAND Y MAX Demand maximeter; it stores the maximum demand value until a demand reset is issued.
DEMAND Y MIN Demand minimeter; it stores the minimum demand value until a demand reset is issued.
DEMAND Y DATE Date of the maximum demand value.

W Three-phase active power

VAR Three-phase reactive power
VA Three-phase apparent power

The maximum or minimum demanded values are stored in non-volatile memory. These are not cleared when the relay is
turned off. When the relay is turned on again, the values are updated.
States associated with the demand (“Actual > Status > Records Status > Demand”) are the following:

Table 5-12: Demand associated values

DEMAND ASOCIATED STATES
DEMAND TRIGGER INP
DEMAND RESET INP

Besides the previously considered demand measures, two states are used for demand control:
DEMAND TRIGGER INP Bit type state, Programmable at “Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements” in the
EnerVista 650 Setup software. This signal is used by the Block Interval demand method.
DEMAND RESET INP Bit type state, programmable at “Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements” in the
EnerVista 650 Setup software. When this bit is activated, the demand measures are reset. All
stored values are reset to zero (for demand dates, this value represents January 1st, 2000).

5.2.7 Time Settings

The date and time can be synchronized to a known time using the SNTP protocol, IRIG-B protocol (when it provides UTC
Time) or IEEE1588 (Available starting from version V7.00) and the TIME SETTINGS allow setting the date and time provided
by these protocols to the proper local time on the Real Time Clock.

When there is no SNTP protocol enabled, IRIG-B protocol is not set to UTC Time or IEEE1588 synchronization, the TIME
SETTINGS are not used in the Real Time Clock but are still used to calculate the UTC Time (i.e., for the IEC61850 protocol),
but its behavior is not assumed correct in several critical hour changes because of Daylight Savings Time getting effective.
In these configuration cases, it is recommended to disable Daylight Savings Time.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-29

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

Table 5-13: Time Settings

The TIME SETTINGS settings are as follows:

LOC. TIME OFFS. UTC:

Is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time (Greenwich Mean Time) in hours.

DAYLIG. SAVINGS TIME:

Allow the unit clock to follow DST rules of the local time zone.

DST START MONTH:

Allow to set the start month of the DST from January to December

DST START WEEKDAY

Allow to set the start weekday of the DST from Monday to Sunday

DST START DAY INST:

Allow to set the start day instance from First, Second, Third, Fourth or Last

DST START HOUR

Allow to set the starting hour of the DST (in local time)

DST STOP MONTH

Allow to set the stop month of the DST from January to December

DST STOP WEEKDAY

Allow to set the stop weekday of the DST from Monday to Sunday

DST STOP DAY INST

Allow to set the stop day instance from First, Second, Third, Fourth or Last

DST STOP HOUR

Allow to set the stop hour of the DST (in local time)

IRIG-B LOCAL TIME:

Determines, in case of being enabled, if the IRIG-B protocol would carry the date in local time or else in UTC Time.

IRIG-B FUNCTION:
Setting for enable or disable the IRIG-B protocol

5-30 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

PTP IRIG-B PRIORITY:

If two or more time sources are setup the time source with the higher priority shown in the table below is used where 1 is
considered to be the highest priority. Note that the time source priority of PTP and IRIG-B can be swapped. Setting
changes become active after reboot.

The F650 is capable of receiving a time reference from several time sources in addition to its own internal clock for the
purpose of time stamping events, transient recorders and other occurrences within the relay. The accuracy of the time
stamp is based on the time reference that is used. The F650 supports an internal clock, SNTP, IRIG-B and 1588 as potential
time references.

Regarding the PTP, F650 acts as an ordinary clock, with only Sync and Pdelay_Req messages.

Table 5-14: Synchronization priority table

Time source Accuracy Priority
PTP 1*
IRIG-B 2*
SNTP 3
Internal Clock 4

The priority of IRIG B and PTP can be swapped

Note:
Synchronization by IEC103, DNP, Modbus and IEC104 is not going to be issued if there is a synch source from IRIG-B,
SNTP or PTP.

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-31

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

5.3 System setup

This section shows the settings related to the system setup definition.

5.3.1 General settings

This section determines the settings of the element configuration regarding its connection to the power system.

Setpoint > System Setup > General settings

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Phase CT ratio Phase CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Ground CT ratio Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Sensitive ground CT ratio Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT ratio Phase VT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT connection Phase VT Connection WYE N/A [WYE – DELTA]
Rated voltage Nominal Voltage 100.0 0.1 [1.0 : 250.0]
Rated Frequency Nominal Frequency 50 Hz N/A [50-60]
Phase rotation Phase Rotation ABC N/A [ABC – ACB]
Frequency reference Frequency Reference VI N/A [VI-VII-VIII]
Auxiliary Voltage Auxiliary Voltage VX N/A [VX – VN]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Primary Meter Units Primary Meter Units KA_KV N/A [KA_KV; A_V]
Device Name Device Name N/A

The system rated voltage is used as reference by the voltage restraint in the phase timed overcurrent element.
The Frequency reference marks the voltage channel to which the system Frequency is measured.
The auxiliary voltage setting can be selected between VN and VX.
VN means that all elements using neutral voltage take the value directly from the fourth voltage input.
VX means that all elements using neutral voltage take the value calculated from phase voltages.

5.3.2 Miscellaneous settings

This section determines the relays status configuration regarding the service and local or remote modes.

Setpoint > System Setup > MISCELLANEOUS settings

setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Relay Out of Service Relay Out of Service ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Local/Remote Blocked Local/Remote Blocked OFF N/A [ON -OFF]
Active Language Active Language 0 N/A [0;1]

5.3.2.1 Out of service setting

The unit Relay Out of Service setting is configured in Setpoint > System Setup > Miscellaneous. The unit also has an Out
of Service status that is configured in Relay configuration > Protection elements. When active, these states stop all
changes to PLC equations and functions, including changes in the input/output boards, so if there is a change in any input

5-32 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

or output the unit will not show this change until has returned to ready mode. For example, if an output is closed and the
unit goes to the Out of Service state, the output is kept closed even if the state that closed it changes and would otherwise
open the output. When the unit goes out of the Out of Service state, the output is then opened.

Functions affected by Out of service State

- IO Boards.
- Protection functions
o Current:
• Phase IOC Low (50PL)
• Phase IOC High (50PH)
• Phase TOC High (51PH)
• Phase TOC Low (51PL)
• Phase Dir (67P)
• Thermal Model (49)
• Ground TOC (51G)
• Ground IOC (50G)
• Ground Dir (67G)
• Neutral TOC (51N)
• Neutral IOC (50N)
• Neutral Dir (67N)
• Senstv Gnd TOC (51SG)
• Senstv Gnd IOC (50SG)
• Sensitive Gnd Dir (67SG)
• IS Ground IOC (50IG)
• Neg Seq TOC (46)
• Neg Seq Dir (67I2)

o Voltage:
• Auxiliary OV (59X)
• Voltage Unbalance (60V)
• Phase UV (27)
• Neutral OV High (59NH)
• Neutral OV Low (59NL)
• Neg Seq OV (47)
• Auxiliary UV (27X)
• Phase OV (59)

o Power:
• Forward Power (32FP)
• Directional Power (32DIR)
• Watt Gnd Flt Low (32NL)
• Watt Gnd Flt High (32NH)

o Frequency:

1601-0800-A3 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 5-33

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS

• Underfrequency (81U)
• Overfrequency (81O)
• Frequency Rate of Change (81df/dt)

o Misc:
• Broken Conductor (I1I2)
• Load Encroachment
• Rotor Blocked (48)
• Setting Groups
• Recloser (79)
• Oscillography
• Synchrocheck (25)
• Fault Locator
• Max. number of starts (66)
• Fuse Failure (VTFF)
• Data Logger
• Comparator
• Switchgear
• Breaker

When the Out of Service status goes to ON, or the setting has been changed to Enabled, the ready LED changes to red. Be
careful if the ready LED is linked to an output, because the output will not change its state. To set an output to the ready
state, see the factory default Logic & Configuration. Take notice that VO_000 is set to the output instead of VO_099

The following figure shows the flow chart of these states

Only if there is any change from Enabled to

OUT OF SERVICE Disabled

Only if LOGIC:
FLOWCHART Relay Out Of Service
goes from Enabled to
Disabled

RELAY IN Ready OoS status

SERVICE LED ON OFF

SETTING: LOGIC:
START Relay Out Relay Out
Disabled Disabled
Of Service Of Service

Enabled Enabled

Only if there is a change

OoS status from Disabled to Enabled
ON
RELAY OUT
Only if there is any OF SERVICE
change from Disabled to
Enabled

Ready
LED OFF

5-34 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1601-0800-A3